Specifications | Emerson 30-130KVA Power Supply User Manual

COLOUR TELEVISION
HV-34LPZ
HV-29LPZ
Contents
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6
Remote control buttons
and functions . . . 8
Using the TV's menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INSTRUCTIONS
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
1
Black
LCT1215-001A-H
0402-Ki-NV-JMT
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.
To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this
manual thoroughly before you begin.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.
1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.
2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,
grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.
3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.
Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.
When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more
than the minimum distances as shown.
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.
5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.
Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.
6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it
when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,
wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.
Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.
7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to
disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.
2
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
2
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Setting up your TV
CAUTION
• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV
before connecting anything.
1 Connecting the aerial and VCR
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Fig.A
• Read the manual that came with the VCR
before connecting.
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket
on this TV .
Back of the TV
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial
input socket on the VCR, and
connect the VCR and TV with
another aerial cable.
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack and the TV's
VIDEO jack with a video cable.
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO
cable:
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and TV's S connector with an SVIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a
video cable .
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
R AUDIO L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
Fig.B
Back of the TV
A
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with
an audio cable.
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an
audio cable.
• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK
Supported Devices” on page 38.
3
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
3
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Setting up your TV
2 Connecting the power cord
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.
3 Putting the batteries into the
Remote control
Use two AA/R6 batteries.
end, making sure the
Insert the batteries from the
and
polaritiles are correct.
• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.
• If the remote control does not work properly,
replace the batteries.
• The batteries we supply are only for setting up
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon
as necessary.
4 Making the initial settings
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.
1 Press the main power button on the TV
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.
• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does
not change to green, your TV is in the standby
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote
control to turn the TV on.
• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has
already been turned before. In this case,use the
"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions
to make the initial settings. For details, see
"INSTALL menu" on page 29.
2 Press the MENU/OK button
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
POWER lamp
Main power button
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose
a language for the on-screen language.
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
4
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
4
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Setting up your TV
3 Press the / buttons to choose
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK
button.
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are automatically
stored in the programme numbers list.
AUTO PROGRAM
CH
POWER
TV/VIDEO
10
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20%
0
RETURN
OK
DISP
:OK
:BACK
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press
the DISPLAY button.
MUTING
4 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number (PR)
list, the EDIT menu appears.
EDIT
PIP
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
SUB-P
CH/CC
:BACK
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
SWAP
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in
the programme numbers list, you can register it
using the MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
TEXT
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a
TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL
function, press the MENU/OK button to close the
EDIT menu.
Now, the setting up is complete.
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!
5
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
5
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
TV buttons and functions
Turn the main power on
Press the main power button 1 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is
in the standby mode.
To turn the main power off :
press the main power button again.
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.
Turn the TV on from standby
mode
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and
your TV will be turned on.
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby
mode.
82
7
9
Choose a TV channel
1
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Choose a VIDEO terminal
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Adjust the volume
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .
The volume level indicater appears.
MENU button 6
(Behind the cover)
Press to open the menu.
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on
the TV" on page 19.
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
IN (VIDEO-4)
0
-
R
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
65 43
Remote control sensor
and ECO sensor 9
ECO lamp 7
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.
6
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
6
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
TV buttons and functions
SPATIALIZER lamp 8
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.
Headphone jack 0
AUDIO
R
Connect the headphones with a stereo
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).
When using the headphones, follow the
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 25.
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
VIDEO-1 terminal =
• See page 3 and 36.
AUDIO
S
L/MONO VIDEO
R
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
L/MONO
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
!
• See page 36.
OUTPUT
@
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal !
• See page 28 and 36.
VIDEO
VIDEO-4 terminal -
AV COMPU LINK
$
VIDEO-2 terminal ~
Y/VIDEO
AUDIO
R
=
~
• See page 36.
#
OUTPUT terminal @
• See page 36.
Aerial socket #
Connect the aerial cable.
• See page 3.
AV COMPU LINK terminal $
• See page 36 and 38.
7
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
7
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
Turn the TV on from standby mode
Press the POWER button.
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be
turned on.
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+
buttons or the number buttons.
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To turn the TV off:
Press the POWER button again.
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV
enters standby mode.
0
RETURN
Choose a TV channel
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has
been set.
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the
programme number (PR) with the number
buttons.
• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry
system.
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.
• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR
SYSTEM button" on page 11.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the
picture appears normally, follow the operation
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
Adjust the volume
TEXT
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.
• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 25.
8
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
8
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
Watch images from external
devices
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external
device has been connected.
16:9
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 aspect ratio).
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.
To return to a TV channel:
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+
buttons or the number buttons.
MUTING button
• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect
ratio that have been squeezed into a
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you
can restore their original demensions.
Press the MUTING button to turn off
the volume. Pressing the MUTING
button again resumes the previous
volume level.
SPATIALIZER button
ZOOM button
Press the SPATIALIZER button to
choose a mode.
You can change the screen size according to the
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one
from the following ZOOM modes.
Press the ZOOM button to choose a
mode.
• If you press the ZOOM button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen and
the ZOOM function does not operate.
You can enjoy Surround sound with a
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER
function.
LIVE :
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo
sound converting it into surround sound
with added depth and ambience.
MONO :
Mono allows you to enjoy normal
monaural sound by converting it into a
stereo-like sound.
REGULAR
OFF :
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as
its original size is.
This function is turned off.
• The LIVE mode works properly only
with stereo sound.
• The LIVE mode does not work
correctly with headphones.
ZOOM
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect
ratio) to fill the TV screen.
• The MONO mode works properly only
with monaural sound.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
• The left side and right side of the Wide
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.
9
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
9
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
BASS button
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)
function.
Press the BASS button to turn the
SUPER BASS function on or off.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
PICTURE MODE button
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to
adjust the picture settings automatically.
Press the PICTURE MODE button
choose a mode.
BRIGHT :
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD :
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT :
Softens contrast and sharpness.
RETURN+ button
The RETURN+ button has two functions;
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN
function. If a channel has been registerd as
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+
function operates. If there is no setting for
the "Return Channel", the RETURN
function operates.
RETURN+ function :
By registering a channel you frequently
view as the "Return Channel", you can
select that channel at any time simply by
pressing the RETURN+ button.
To register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
Choose the Programme number to which
the channel you want to register has been
set, and press the RETURN+ button and
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is
displayed and the registration is completed.
To cancel register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
while viewing any TV channel, press the
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS
CANCELED!" is displayed and the registration is cancelled.
• When you turn off the TV, the
registration for the "Return Channel" is
cancelled.
• If you want to view the "Return Channel"
and another TV channel alternately, first
choose a channel other than the
"Return Channel". and then press the
RETURN+ button to change the
channel to the "Return Channel" In this
way, you can view two channels
alternately by pressing the RETURN+
button.
RETURN function :
The TV temporarily memorises the TV
channel that was choosen right before the
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can
alternately view the current TV channel and
the "Last Channel".
• If you want to view two channels
alternately by using the RETURN
function, first choose one TV channel
and then choose the other TV channel
with the Number buttons. If you choose
the TV channel without using the
Number buttons, there are cases where
a channel other than the one you first
chose is registered as the "Last
Channel".
10
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
10
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
/ button
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
Press the
/ button to
choose a sound mode.
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
DISPLAY button
You can display the PR LIST, programme
number or VIDEO terminal number on the
screen.
Press the DISPLAY button.
Press the DISPLAY button changes the
display as follows:
PR LIST
ID
1
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
-10
No indication
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
1 Press the DISPLAY button to
display the PR LIST.
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose a programme number
or VIDEO terminal.
Then press the MENU/OK
button.
• For programme numbers with the
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed
next to the programme number in the PR
LIST.
: Stereo sound
PR
Choose a TV channel or a
VIDEO terminal
• The VIDEO terminals are registered after
the programme number PR99.
COLOUR SYSTEM button
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button
to choose the appropriate colour
system.
AUTO :
This function detects a colour system from
the input signal.
• The AUTO mode may not function
properly if you have poor signal quality.
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO
mode, choose another colour system
manually.
• The AUTO mode detects a colour system
from the input signal and chooses the
appropiate colour system automatically.
• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15
for details.
+10
11
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
11
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
• For the colour systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
SOUND SYSTEM button
The sound system is chosen automatically. However, if you cannot hear the
sound normally even when the picture
appears normally, chooes the sound
system maunually.
Press the SOUND SYSTEM
button to choose the appropriate
sound system.
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS
For sound sysytem colour system in your country
or rigion, refer to the table below.
COLOUR SYSTEM
Area
Middle
China, Vietnam, etc
PAL
East
Hong Kong, etc
PAL
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
Europe
: I system
D/K : D/K system
M
Oceania
: M system
• This function does not work in the
VIDEO mode.
• For the sound systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
Africa
Area
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
NTSC
Russia, etc
SECAM
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
PAL
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
PAL
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
PAL
PAL
Republic of South Africa, etc
PAL
Nigeria, etc
PAL
Egypt, Morocco, etc
SECAM
Country or Region
B/G
China, Vietnam, etc
D/K
Hong Kong, etc
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
B/G
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
M
Russia, etc
D/K
Europe
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
D/K
B/G
Oceania
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
Republic of South Africa, etc
I
B/G
Africa
Nigeria, etc
B/G
Egypt, Morocco, etc
B/G
East
12
12
System
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
Middle
Black
SECAM
SOUND SYSTEM
Asia,
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
System
Asia,
B/G : B/G system
I
Country or Region
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
PAL
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
I
Remote control buttons and functions
FREEZE button
You can view the Main picture's forzen image
as the SUB-picture.
Press the FREEZE button.
Still pictures
MAIN
To cancel the FREEZE function :
Press the FREEZE button again.
• If you press the STROBE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the STROBE function does
not operate.
• You cannot change the TINT setting for
the still images on the screen even if
you are viewing a programme with
NTSC colour system.
Using the MULTI
function
• You cannot use the FREEZE button when
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are
displayed on the screen.
You can display multi-pictures that enable
you to easily find a program you want to
view.
• If you press the FREEZE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the FREEZE function does
not operate.
1 Press the MULTI button.
Press the MULTI button changes the
display as follow:
5-pictures multi mode
STROBE button
1
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15
consecutive still images.
2
1
3
MAIN
Still
pictures
4
Press the STROBE button.
5
Moving
picture
16-pictures multi mode
Moving
picture
To cancel the STROBE function:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
12
5
16
Press the STROBE button to return to the
MAIN-picture.
• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is
weak, the still images become abnormal.
• You cannot use the STROBE button
when the SUB-picture or the MAINpicture are displayed on the screen.
Still
pictures
Moving
picture
Cancel the MULTI function
To display next Multi pictures :
Press the NEXT button.
13
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
13
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
2 Choose the desired picture with
the / and / buttons, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
The screen switches to the TV channel or
VIDEO mode of your choice.
• Any programme numbers to which no TV
channel has been registered, or
programme numbers to which
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not
displayed.
• You cannot perform menu operations
such as headphone volume adjustment.
Cancel the MULTI function once to
perform menu operations.
• If you press the MULTI button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the MULTI function does not
operate.
Using the PIP function
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at
the same time.
Press the PIP button.
Press the PIP button changes the display as
follows:
Twin pictures mode
2
5
SUB
MAIN
Picture in picture mode
2
SUB
5
MAIN
• During the short period that is required
for the Multi-pictures display to close no
sound comes from the television.
Cancel the PIP function
• You cannot view a picture from the same
programme number (or the same VIDEO
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and
the SUB-picture at the same time.
• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the
quality of the SUB-picture may also be
poor.
• If the picture standards of both pictures
are different, the top and bottom or one of
them may be missing.
• The ZOOM function does not operate
when viewing pictures using the PIP
function.
• The SUB-picture cannot be output from
TV.
• If you press the PIP button when receiving
the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen
and the PIP function does not operate.
14
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
14
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
Choose a TV channel for
the SUB-picture
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.
Listen to the sound of SUBpicture
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on
your headphones while listening to the sound
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.
Change the colour system
of the SUB-picture
• You cannot change the COLOUR
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the
COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote
control.
POSITION button
You can adjust the position of the SUBPicture when using the Picture in picture
mode.
Press the POSITION button
repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, the SUBPicture moves counterclockwise.
1 While the SUB-picture is displayed, press the MENU/OK
button to display the MENU
(main manu).
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,
and then press the MENU/OK
button.
3 Press the / buttons to
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
SWAP button
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the
SUB-picture with each other.
Press the SWAP button.
COLOUR SYSTEM
MAIN
SUB
NTSC 3.58
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
4 Press the / buttons to
choose SUB, and then press the
/ buttons to choose the
appropriate colour system. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
• Do not press the SWAP button while you
are recording the TV output on the VCR.
If you do, the output signal will change.
15
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
15
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
Viewing a teletext
programme
1 Choose a TV channel with a
teletext broadcast.
2 Press the TV/TEXT button.
Press the TV/TEXT button changes the
mode as follows:
HOLD button
You can hold a teletext page on the screen
for as long as you want, even while several
other teletext pages are being received.
Press the HOLD button.
The
(hold) are displayed at the top left
of the screen.
To cancel the Hold function:
Press the HOLD button again.
REVEAL button
TV mode
TV and
Text mode
Some teletext pages include hidden text
(such as answers to a quiz).
You can display the hidden text.
Each time you press the REVEAL
button, text is hidden or revealed.
Text mode
3 Choose a teletext page by
pressing the CHANNEL-/+
buttons, number buttons or
coloured buttons.
To return to the TV mode:
Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO
button.
• If you have trouble receiving tetetext
broadcasts, consult your local dealer or
the broadcast station.
• In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is
fixed to the REGULAR mode.
• No menu operations are possible when
viewing a teletext programme.
• If characters on a teletext programme do
not appear properly, change the
TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For
details, see “TELETEXT LANGUAGE” on
page 34.
SIZE button
You can double the height of teletext
display.
Press the SIZE button.
INDEX button
You can return to the index page instantly.
Press the INDEX button.
• In the List mode, you can return to the
page number displayed in the lower left
area of the screen.
CANCEL button
You can serch for a teletext page while
watching TV.
1 Press the number button to
enter a page number, or press
the coloured button.
The TV searches for a teletext page.
16
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
16
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Remote control buttons and functions
2 Press the CANCEL button.
The TV programme appears. When the
TV finds the teletext page, its page
number appears in the upper left of the
screen.
3 Press the CANCEL button to
return to a teletext page when
the page number is on the
screen.
• You cannot return to the TV mode with
the CANCEL button.
SUBPAGE button
Some teletext pages include sub-pages that
are automatically displayed. You can hold
any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.
1 Press the SUBPAGE button to
operate the Sub-page function.
Sub-page numbers are displayed at the
left of the screen.
Colour*
Yellow
White
Blue or Red
Meaning of sub-page number
Currently being displayed.
Can be displayed.
Cannot be displayed and
it is not sent.
* : Background color of the sub-page
number.
2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons
to choose a sub-page number.
Using the List mode
You can store the numbers of your favourite
teletext pages in memory and call them up
quickly using the coloured buttons.
To store the page numbers :
1 Press the MODE button to
engage the List mode.
The stored page numbers are displayed
at the buttom of the screen.
2 Press a coloured button to
choose a position. Then press
the number buttons to enter the
page number.
3 Press and hold down the
STORE button.
The four page numbers blink white to
indicate that they are stored in memory.
To call up a stored page :
1 Press the MODE button to
engage the List mode.
2 Press a coloured button to
which a page has been assigned.
To exit the List mode :
Press the MODE button again.
To cancel the Sub-page function:
Press the SUBPAGE button again.
17
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
17
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Using the TV's menu
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating
techniques fully.
Basic operation
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display
the MENU (main menu).
MENU
PICTURE SETTING
INSTALL
PICTURE FEATURES
DEMO
SOUND SETTING
9
FEATURES
0
RETURN
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu
indicates buttons on the remote control you
can use when you operate a chosen function.
MENU/OK button
TV
TV/VIDEO button
DISP.
DISPLAY button
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
OK
SWAP
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
2 Press the / and / buttons to
choose a menu title, and press the
MENU/OK button.
The menu appears.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
To return to the previous menu:
Press the DISPLAY button.
To exit a menu instantly:
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
TEXT
3 Press the
function.
/
buttons to choose a
• For details of the functions in the menus, see
the following pages.
18
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
18
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Using the TV's menu
4 Press the / buttons to
choose the setting of that function.
• If you want to operate a function which
appears only with its name, follow the
descriptions of that function on the
following pages.
5 Press the MENU/OK button to
comple the setting.
The menu disappears.
• When watching the television with the
NTSC system, the menus are displayed
at about half of their normal verical size.
Operation with the
buttons on the TV
You can also operate the menus using the
buttons on the front panel of the TV.
OK
button
/
buttons
/
buttons
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
button
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
• There is no button on the front panel of
the TV that has the function of the
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.
19
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
19
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE SETTING menu
PICTURE SETTING
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
SHARP
COLOUR
TINT
WHITE BALANCE
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
STANDARD
MID
ON
RESET
SHARP
You can adjust the picture sharpness.
: softer
: sharper
• You cannot select the SHARP function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
COLOUR
PICTURE MODE
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs to adjust the picture settings
automatically.
BRIGHT:
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD:
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT:
Softens contrast and sharpness.
• You can also operate the PICTURE
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE
button on the remote control.
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"
on page 10.
Adjusting the picture
You can change the picture settings of each
picture mode as you like. The picture settings
changed are stored in the picture mode.
CONTRAST
You can adjust the picture contrast.
: lower
: higer
BRIGHT
You can adjust the picture brighetness.
: darker
: brighter
You can adjust the picture colour.
: lighter
: deeper
TINT
You can adjust the picture tint.
: reddish
: greenish
• You can change the TINT setting (picture
tint) only when the colour system is
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.
• You cannot select the TINT function when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal).
To return to the default settings
in each PICTURE MODE :
Press the blue button. Returns the picture
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE
MODE mode to the default settings, and
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.
WHITE BALANCE
You can select one of three WHITE
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since
white is the colour which is used as a
refernce for all the other colours, changing
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the
appearance of all the other colours on the
screen.
COOL:
A bluish white. Using this mode when
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy
a more vivid and bright picture.
20
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
20
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE FEATURES menu
MID:
The normal white colour.
PICTURE FEATURES
WARM:
A raddish white. Using this mode when
watching films allows you to enjoy colours
that are characteristic of films.
• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE
function in the Twin pictures mode or the
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON, the screen contrast is automatically adjusted to a setting suitable for the
brightness of your room. This reduces eye
strain for you and the power consumption of
the TV.
DIGITAL VNR
DigiPure
PULL DOWN
COLOUR SYSTEM
ZOOM
PICTIRE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
DIGITAL VNR
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the
amount of noise in the original picture.
• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR
function when receiving the Progressive
Video Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will be automatically adjust the level
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the
best possible picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
DISPLAY :
This function is turned on. Further, clover
marks indicating the brightness of your
room are displayed for several seconds each
time the brightness changes. The number of
clover marks displayed on the screen
increases as your room becomes darker.
• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too
high it can make the picture less sharp.
It is recommended to use the AUTO
setting if you can.
MAX:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
MIN:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness
of the original picture has not been
reproduced fully, change the setting from
AUTO to MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
21
LCT1215-001A-H_p1-21
21
Black
4/11/02, 8:58 AM
Using the TV's menu
DigiPure
MIN:
The Digipure function uses the latest in
digital technology to give you a natural
looking picture. The Digipure function
includes the following two functions.
Digipure function:
This function helps to create a natural looking
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges
from high-contrast and crisp images.
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,
edges are added to produce a sharper, more
detailed picture.
You can choose from the DigiPure function
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.
Picture motion compensation
function:
This function displays fast-moving pictures
(for example, the players or ball in a football
game) more smoothly and naturally on the
screen.
• You cannot select the Digipure function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will automatically adjust the level of
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of
noise in the picture, giving the best possible
picture.
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of
noise, this may actually make the noise
worse. It is recommended to use the
AUTO setting if you can.
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the
setting from AUTO to MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain very little
noise.
OFF:
The DigiPure function is turned off.
PULL DOWN
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema
film picture more smoothly and naturally on
the screen.
AUTO:
This function is turned on. Normally keep this
function set to AUTO.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
• The motion may appear unnatural when
viewing images with the NTSC colour
system. To make the motion smoother,
switch the PULL DOWN function from
AUTO to OFF.
• You cannot select this function in the
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in
picture mode.
MAX:
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality
has not been reproduced fully, change the
setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
22
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
22
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
COLOUR SYSTEM
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
You can change the screen size according to
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum
one of three ZOOM modes.
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the
MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
REGULAR
ZOOM
16:9
COLOUR SYSTEM
PAL
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to choose
the appropriate colour system.
Then press the MENU/OK
button.
• When changing to the COLOUR
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see
"Change the colour system of the SUBpicture" on page 15 for details.
• You can also operate the COLOUR
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR
SYSTEM button on the remote control.
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM
button" on page 11.
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a ZOOM mode. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
The picture expands and the chosen
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5
seconds.
• You can choose a ZOOM mode from
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.
• You cannot select the ZOOM function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
PICTURE TILT
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic
force may make the picture tilt. If this
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then
press the MENU/OK button.
PICTURE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons until the
picture becomes level. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
23
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
23
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
SOUND SETTING menu
SOUND SETTING
STEREO/
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
AI VOLUME
BBE
SPATIALIZER
SUPER BASS
HEADPHONE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
MONO
ON
ON
LIVE
ON
STEREO / I•II
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
: Stereo sound
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound to your liking.
BALANCE
You can adjust the volume balance between
the left and right speakers.
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.
AI VOLUME
You can prevent the sudden increase or
decrease of sound that occurs when
changing the channel to another channel or
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO
mode.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.
For example, you can set it to be OFF in
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.
If you set the AI VOLUME function while
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,
the setting is registered as the setting for
VIDEO mode.
• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate
as expected if the sound input level from
a broadcast station (or video software) is
extremely low.
BBE
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easyto-listen sound that is faithful to the original
sound recorded.
BASS
ON :
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
OFF :
TREBLE
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
This function is turned on.
This function is turned off.
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE
is a registered trademark of BBE
Sound, inc.
24
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
24
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's Menu
SPATIALIZER
TV SPEAKER:
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER
modes.
• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "
on page 9.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
SUPER BASS
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)
function.
When this function is on, the TV’s speaker
does not shut off the sound even if headphones are connected.
If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker
does not output the sound when the
headphones are connected.
OUTPUT:
You can choose the sound from the MAINpicture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when
using the headphones.
• The TV’s speaker does not put out the
sound from the SUB-picture.
• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono
only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
HEADPHONE
This function enables you to output the TV’s
sound from your headphones.
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then
press MENU/OK button.
HEADPHONE
05
ON
MAIN
VOLUME
TV SPEAKER
OUTPUT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Use the / button to select,
and the / button to set the
HEADPHONE function. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
VOLUME :
You can adjust the volume of the sound
output from your headphones.
25
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
25
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
FEATURES menu
BLUE BACK
FEATURES
SLEEP TIMER
BLUE BACK
CHILD LOCK
CHANNEL GUARD
AUTO SHUTOFF
VIDEO-3 SETTING
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
ON
OFF
OFF
COMPONENT
You can set the TV to automatically change
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no
input from an external device.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
SLEEP TIMER
You can set the TV to automatically turn off
after a set time.
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then
press the MENU/OK button.
SLEEP TIMER
0
120
CHILD LOCK
You can disable the front control buttons of
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the
TV can be operated only by using the remoto
control.
Use this function to prevent children from
operating the TV at their own discretion
(without parent consent).
OFF
ON :
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
This function is turned on.
OFF:
2 Press the / buttons to set the
period of time.
The TV begins count down from the set
time.
• You can set the period of time a
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10
minitue steps.
To cancel this function:
Press the button to set a period of time to
"OFF".
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
This function is turned off.
CHANNEL GUARD
When there is a TV channel you do not want
your children to watch, you can lock out the
channel. Even when a child chooses a
programme number for a locked out channel
the screen will change to blue and display
so the channel cannot be viewed.
To set this function
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then
press the number 0 (AV) button.
The menu disappers.
SET ID NO.
• One minute before this function turns off
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.
• This function cannot be used to turn off
the TV's main power.
26
0000
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
• When this function is on, you can display
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm
or change the remaining time.
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
26
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV’s menu
2 Set the ID number you want.
To choose a number:
Press the / buttons.
To view a locked TV
channel
1 Choose a programme number in
which a TV channel locked with
the number buttons or PR LIST.
To move a cursor:
Press the / buttons.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
The screen changes to blue and the
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.
CHANNEL GUARD
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH / CC
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
5
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• You cannot choose a locked TV channel
with the / buttons.
GUARD
4 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
• The TV shows the TV programme which
the chosen TV channel is now
broadcasting.
5 Press the blue button to set this
function to the TV channel.
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the
TV channel is locked.
To cancel this function:
Press the blue button again.
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and
the lock is released.
6 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappears.
2 Press the DISPLAY button to
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber
input screen).
5
ID NO.:
3 Press the number buttons to
enter the ID number.
The lock is temporarily released so you
can view the TV channel.
If you have forgotten the ID number:
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".
After confirming the ID number, press the
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.
• When you would like to cancel the
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must
perform the operation " To set this
function" again.
27
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
27
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
AUTO SHUTOFF
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are
received for about 15 minutes or longer after
the end of a broadcast.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not
turn off the TV's main power.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a
VIDEO mode.
VIDEO-3 SETTING
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly according to the video signal input from the external
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If
this setting is incorrect, images will not be
displayed.
VIDEO :
If a normal video signal (composite video
signal) is input.
COMPONENT :
If a Component video signal (Y/CB/CR
signals) is input.
• For detailed connecting methods, see
" Additional preparation " on page 36.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)
only when the component video signal is
input.
28
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
28
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV’s menu
INSTALL menu
AUTO PROGRAM
CH
INSTALL
LANGUAGE
AUTO PROGRAM
EDIT/MANUAL
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
OK
DISP
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press
the MENU/OK button.
:OK
TV
:EXIT
:BACK
:BACK
2 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number
list, the EDIT menu appears.
You can choose the language you want to
use for the on-screen display from the
language list in a menu.
OK
:OK
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,
press the DISPLAY button.
LANGUAGE
DISP
10
20%
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a language.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappers.
AUTO PROGRAM
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"
on page 30.
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not
stored in the programme numbers list,
you can register it using the MANUAL
function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page
30.
You can automatically register the TV
channels which can be received well at
your residence in the TV's programme
numbers by performing the following.
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not
store a TV channel to the programme
number 0 (AV).
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK
button to exit from the EDIT menu.
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are
automatically stored in the programme
numbers list.
29
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
29
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
EDIT/MANUAL
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into
two types:
editing of the current programme numbers
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a
TV channel you want to view to the
programme number (MANUAL function).
This function adds a new TV channel in the
current programme numbers list by using the
CH/CC number.
DELETE :
This function deletes a unnecessary TV
Channel.
MANUAL :
CAUTION
• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT
function rewrites the current programme
numbers list.
Resultingly, the programme number of
some of the TV channels will change.
• When a TV channel which has been
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD
function, using the MANUAL function for
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL
GUARD function.
• When a TV channel has already been
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT
function deletes the TV channel.
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then
press the MENU/OK button.
This function manually registers a new TV
channel in a programme number.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
• For programme number PR 0, "AV"
appears in the programme numbers list.
FUNCTIONS
MOVE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the button to start the
MOVE function.
EDIT
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE :
This function changes a programme number
of a TV channel.
ID :
This function registers a Channel name (ID)
to a TV channel.
30
Black
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
21
22
23
24
25
26
CC
01
02
03
:BACK
STORE
2 Follow the operation description
of a function you want to use and
operate the function.
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
ID
DISP
MOVE
30
INSERT:
3 Press the / buttons to
choose a new programe number.
To cancel the MOVE function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the button to change the
programme number of a TV
channel to a new programme
number.
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV’s menu
ID
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the red button to start the
ID function.
3 Enter a channel name (ID).
Press the / buttons to
choose a character.
press the / buttons to move
the cursor.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
M
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01(B/G)
02
03
SEARCH+
SEARCHFINE+
FINE-
SYSTEM
To cancel the MANUAL function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
3 Press the button to choose the
system (sound system) for a TV
channel you want to register.
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
MANUAL
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• For the sound systems in each country
or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page
12.
To cancel the ID function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the MENU/OK button to
register a channel name to a TV
channel.
DELETE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the yellow button to delete
the TV channel.
The TV channel is deleted from the
programme numbers list.
MANUAL
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number to
which you want to register a new
TV channel.
2 Press the bule button to activate
the MANUAL function.
4 Press the green or red button to
search for a TV channel.
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV
channel. Then the TV channel is
displayed.
5 Press the green or red button
repeatedly until the to TV channel
you want appears.
If the TV channel reception is poor:
Press the bule or yerrow button to
finetune the TV channel.
If you cannot hear the normal sound
even when the picture of the TV channel
appers normally:
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the
button and choose a SYSTEM that has
normal sound.
6 Press the MENU/OK button and
register the TV channel to a
programme number.
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.
At the right side following the CH/CC
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of
the TV channel appears.
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
31
Black
31
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
INSERT
PREPARATION
• Find the CH/CC number corresponding
to the channel number of the TV channel
from the on page 33.
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number for
which you will register a new TV
channel.
2 Press the green button to start
the INSERT function.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
**
02
03
`-9
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
CH/CC
3 Press the / buttons to
choose "CC" or "CH" according
to the CH/CC number of the TV
channel.
To cancel the INSERT function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the Number buttons to
enter the remaining CH/CC
number.
The TV shifts to registration mode.
When the registration is completed, the
picture of the TV channel appears on the
screen.
• The CH/CC number is a number
indicating the broadcast frequency to the
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV
channel corresponding to the broadcast
frequency indicated by the CH/CC
number, a picture in the no-signal state
appears.
32
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
32
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV’s menu
CH/CC number
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel
number of the TV channel from this table.
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.
Channel
CH
CH 02
CH 03
CH 04
CH 05
CH 06
CH 07
CH 08
CH 09
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16
CH 17
CH 18
CH 19
CH 20
CH 21
CH 22
CH 23
CH 24
CH 25
CH 26
CH 27
CH 28
CH 29
CH 30
CH 31
CH 32
CH 33
CH 34
CH 35
CH 36
CH 37
CH 38
CH 39
CH 40
CH 41
CH 42
CH 43
CH 44
CH 45
CH 46
CH 47
CH 48
CH 49
CH 50
CH 51
CH 52
CH 53
CH 54
CH 55
CH 56
CH 57
CH 58
CH 59
CH 60
CH 61
CH 62
CH 63
CH 64
CH 65
CH 66
CH 67
CH 68
CH 69
CH 70
US
US-2
US-3
US-4
US-5
US-6
US-7
US-8
US-9
US-10
US-11
US-12
US-13
US-14
US-15
US-16
US-17
US-18
US-19
US-20
US-21
US-22
US-23
US-24
US-25
US-26
US-27
US-28
US-29
US-30
US-31
US-32
US-33
US-34
US-35
US-36
US-37
US-38
US-39
US-40
US-41
US-42
US-43
US-44
US-45
US-46
US-47
US-48
US-49
US-50
US-51
US-52
US-53
US-54
US-55
US-56
US-57
US-58
US-59
US-60
US-61
US-62
US-63
US-64
US-65
US-66
US-67
US-68
US-69
CCIR
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
OIRT
R1
R2
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
E67
E68
E69
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
33
Black
AUSTRALIA
AU-0
AU-1
AU-2
AU-6
AU-7
AU-8
AU-9
AU-10
AU-11
CC
CC 01
CC 02
CC 03
CC 04
CC 05
CC 06
CC 07
CC 08
CC 09
CC 10
CC 11
CC 12
CC 13
CC 14
CC 15
CC 16
CC 17
CC 18
CC 19
CC 20
CC 21
CC 22
CC 23
CC 24
CC 25
CC 26
CC 27
CC 28
CC 29
CC 30
CC 31
CC 32
CC 33
CC 34
CC 35
CC 36
CC 37
CC 38
CC 39
CC 40
CC 41
CC 42
CC 43
CC 44
CC 45
CC 46
CC 47
CC 48
CC 49
CC 50
CC 51
CC 52
CC 53
CC 54
CC 55
CC 56
CC 57
CC 58
CC 59
CC 60
CC 61
CC 62
CC 63
CC 64
CC 75
CC 76
CC 77
CC 78
CC 79
CC 95
CC 96
CC 97
CC 98
CC 99
US
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1
W+2
W+3
W+4
W+5
W+6
W+7
W+8
W+9
W+10
W+11
W+12
W+13
W+14
W+15
W+16
W+17
W+18
W+19
W+20
W+21
W+22
W+23
W+24
W+25
W+26
W+27
W+28
Channel
CCIR
OIRT
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-20
S-21
S-22
S-23
S-24
S-25
S-26
S-27
S-28
S-29
S-30
S-31
S-32
S-33
S-34
S-35
S-36
S-37
S-38
S-39
S-40
S-41
X
Y
Z
Z+1
Z+2
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
R3
R4
R5
AUSTRALIA
AU-5
AU-5A
AU-3
AU-4
33
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
There are 4 types of teletext language
groups. Set the teletext language group that
corresponds to the language of the teletext
program that you want to watch.
• Languages that are not included in the
teletext language group that you select,
the sub-titles of the teletext program will
not be displayed properly.
1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,
then press the MENU/OK button.
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
GROUP-1
GROUP-2
GROUP-3
GROUP-4
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a group.
Group
Languages
Turkish, Hungarian, English,
GROUP-1 German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,
Swedish, Finnish
Polish, Serbian, Croatian,
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,
GROUP-2 Rumanian, Hungarian,
German, French, Italian,
Swedish, Finnish
Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,
Lithuanian, Estonian,
GROUP-3 Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,
English, German
Arabic, Czech, Slovak.
GROUP-4 Hungarian, English, German,
French, Italian, Spanish,
Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappears.
34
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
34
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Using the TV's menu
DEMO menu
DEMO
ON
OFF
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
The DEMO function automatically demostrations some of the TV function.
When the DEMO function is set to
ON:
Each time the TV is turned on, the demonstration starts automatically.
If you do not want that to happen, set the
DEMO function to OFF.
1 Press the /
choose ON.
buttons to
To cancel the DEMO function,
choose off.
2 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the settings.
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the
demostration will start.
To stop the demonstration:
Press one of the button on the remote
control.
35
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
35
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Additional preparation
Connecting the external
devices
Connect the devices to the TV, paying
attention to the following connection
diagram.
Before connecting anything:
• Read the manuals provided with the
devices. Depending on the devices, the
connection method may differ from the
figure. In addition, the device settings
may be changed depending on the
connection method to secure proper
operation.
(Behind the cover)
OVER
• Turn off all the devices including the TV.
S
V
L/MONO
R
IN (VIDEO-4)
• The "Specifications" on page 43 contains
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you
are connecting a device not listed in the
following connection diagram, see the
"Specifications" to choose the best
VIDEO terminal.
• Note that connecting cables are not
supplied.
• When connecting devices that are
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported
Devices" on page 38.
AUDIO
R
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
VCR (composite signal)
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
VCR for recording (composite signal)
DVD player (composite signal)
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
DVD player (component video signals;
Y/CB/CR)
TV game (composite signal)
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Camcorder (composite signal)
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Headphones
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
36
36
Black
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
A AV COMPU LINK cable
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
S
OVER
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Additional preparation
Connecting methods
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack
and the device's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack with a video
cable.
If connecting a device to the TV
with an S-VIDEO cabel :
• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack
is indicated by "V".
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks
(L/MONO and R) and the
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R
output) jacks with an audio
cable.
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of
connecting with a video cable.
Note that the connection with a video cable
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO
cable.
If the device's sound output is in
mono :
If connecting a DVD player to the
TV with a component video
cable:
The signals of the images and sound you are
currently viewing with this TV are output
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can
record the currently shown image and sound
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, CB and CR) in
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's
COMPONENT (component video output)
jacks with a component video cables,
instead of connection with a video cable.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPONENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on
page 28.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive video signal (525P signal).
(When the component video signal is
input.)
If you have a DVD player that outputs
Progressive video signals (525P) as a
component video signal, then by
attaching the device to the television with
a component video cable you can see
the actual images that are recorded on a
DVD disc as an original image source.
If connecting a device to the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal
with a video cable:
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with
a video cables.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page
28.
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
37
Black
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.
Connecting devices to the
OUTPUT terminal
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with
a video cable.
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R
input) jacks with an audio cable.
• When you turn off the TV, the signals from
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.
• The component signals input from the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.
Connecting Headphones
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Headphone jack at the TV front panel.
37
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Additional preparation
Connecting AV COMPU
LINK Supported Devices
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a
system in which related devices are
automatically controlled when you operate
one device.
If you apply this system to the TV, you can
have the TV automatically perform the
required operations by operating one
external device. You don't have to use the
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or
change the VIDEO modes.
Examples of the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system operations
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images
from the device.
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a
VCR, you can view the tape.
Simply by operating the AV Control Receiver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed
correctly.
• The performance of the AC COMPU
LINK remote control system varies
depending on the connected device.
See the device’s instruction manual.
• When you select "TV SOUND" as the
input source with the AV Control
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's
MUTING function automatically operates
and the sound from the TV's speakers is
muted.
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+
buttons or the MUTING button on the
TV's remote control to cancel the MUTING function. You can regain the sound
from the TV's speakers.
Conditions to use the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system
• A device equipped with an AV COMPU
LINK terminal is required.
• You must connect the TV and the device
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable
is unavailable, connect them with a cable
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at
both ends.
• You must connect the device to an
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system will not function
correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the
AV COMPU LINK remote control
system”.
• The TV must be in standby mode (the
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),
the AV COMPU LINK remote control
system does not function.
Setting up the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system
CAUTION:
• With some devices, the setup method
differs from the ones explained here.
Be sure to read the device’s instruction
manual thoroughly before setting it up.
1 Connect the device to the TV’s
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.
If you want to connect a DVD
player to the TV with a component video cable :
Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3
terminal.
• For detailed connecting instructions, see
"Connecting the external devices" on
page 36.
38
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
38
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Additional Preparation
2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU
LINK terminal and the device’s
AV COMPU LINK terminal with
an AV COMPU LINK cable.
3 Change the device’s setting
according to the VIDEO terminal
it is connected to.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-1 terminal :
Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-1 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD2.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD3.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a
component video cable:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD1.
• For instructions on how to change the
device’s setting, refer to the device’s
instruction manual.
• If the device you are connecting has
neither the remote control code nor the
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it
to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.
39
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
39
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Troubleshooting
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think
there is a problem with the TV itself.
Important:
• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.
• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the
rearcover of the TV.
If you cannot turn on
the TV
• Is the AC plug connected to the AC
outlet?
• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the
Main power button.
No picture/No sound
• Have you chosen a TV channel whose
reception is extremely bad? In this case,
the BLUE BACK function will be activated, the entire screen becomes blue, and
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you
want to view the TV channel, follow the
description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to
try to change the BLUE BACK function
setting to OFF.
• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct?
Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM
Button” on page 12 to try to solve the
trouble.
Poor picture
• If noise totally obscures the picture (snow), the aerial or aerial cable may have
trouble. Check the following to try to
solve the trouble :
Has the TV and aerial been
connected properly?
Has the aerial cable been damaged?
Is the aerial pointed to the right direction?
Is the aerial itself faulty?
• If the TV or aerial receives interference
from the other devices, stripes or noise
may appear in the picture. Move such
device as an amplifier, personal computer, or a hair drier that can cause interference away from your TV, or try changing its location. If the aerial suffers interference from a radio tower or highvoltage wire, please contact your local
dealer.
• If the TV receives interferences from
signal reflecting from mountains or
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will
occur.
Try to change the aerial’s direction or
replace the antenna with the one with
better directionality.
• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct? Follow the
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.
• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controlled properly? Follow the description
"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try
to adjust them properly.
• Videotaping teletext is not recommended
because it may not record correctly.
40
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
40
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Troubleshooting
• When a white and bright still image (such as a white dress) is displayed on the
screen, the white part may look as if it
were coloured.
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to
the nature of the picture tube itself, and
not due to a TV failure.
When the picture disappears from the
screen, the unnatural colours will also
disappear.
• When viewing images from commercially
available video softwear products, or videos from videotapes which have been
recored improperly, the top of the image
may be distored.
This is due to the condition of the video
signal, and not because of malfunction.
Poor sound
• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE
properly? If not, follow the description
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try
to adjust them properly.
• When the TV channel reception is poor, it
can be hard to hear the stereo or
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the
description "STEREO / I • II" on page 24
to hear the sound more easily by
changing it to a mono sound.
Operation disabled
• Have the batteries of the remote control
become exhausted?
Follow the description "Putting the
Batteries into the Remote Control" on
page 4 and replace them with new
batteries to try solve the problem.
• Have you attempted to use the remote
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at
a location more than seven meters apart
from the TV location? Operate the remote
control in the front of your TV or a
location less than seven meters from
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.
• When you are viewing a teletext programme, you cannot operate the menus.
Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the
teletext programme to the ordinary TV
programme to try operating the menus.
• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,
you cannot operate the TV with the front
control buttons of the TV. Follow the
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to
try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.
• If the TV operation becomes disabled
suddenly, press the Main power button
on the TV and turn off the main power.
Try to press the Main power button again
to turn on the main power. If the TV
returns to a normal state, it is not a
failure.
• The following functions do not operate
when receiving Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal);
Remote control function:
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and
STROBE BUTTON
MENU function:
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure
and ZOOM
Other concerns
• When the SLEEP TIMER function or
AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the
TV is automatically turned off.
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to
press the POWER button to turn on the
TV once again. At this time, if the TV
resumes a normal state, there is no
problem.
• If you do not want sound emitted from
the TV’s speakers when using
headphones, change the TV SPEAKER
setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.
For details, see “HEADPHONE” on page
25.
41
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
41
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Troubleshooting
• If you bring a magnetised device such
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture
may be warped or unnatural colours
appear at the corners of the screen.
In this case, keep the device apart from
your TV. If the speaker causes such
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded
speaker instead.
• A picture may be tilted due to the influence of the earth's magnetism. In this
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page
23 to complete the tilt.
• It takes a short period of time from the
time an operation such as changing
channels is performed until an image is
displayed. This is not a malfunction.
This is the time required for the image to
stabilize before it can be displayed.
• The TV may emit a crackling sound due
to a sudden change in temperature. It
does not matter if a picture or sound
does not show any abnormality. If you
hear crackling sounds frequently while
you are viewing the TV, other causes may
be assumed.
For precautionary purposes, request
your service technician to inspect it.
• Touching the screen may cause you feel
a slight electric shock due to its static
electricity.
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to
the construction of the picture tube. It is
not a problem with the TV.
You can rest assured that this static discharge does not have harmful influence
over the human boby.
42
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
42
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
Specifications
Broadcasting systems
Colour systems
Channels and frequencies
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz
UHF channel (U)
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system
FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)
Please see the table in the description
"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.
RCA connector X 5
• Video input/Component video (Y/CB/CR) input and Audio
L/R inputs are available.
• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm
HV-34LPZ : 75kg
HV-29LPZ : 48kg
Sound-multiplex systems
Teletext systems
Lauguages displayed by
teletext
Power requirements
Audio output
VIDEO-1 terminal
VIDEO-2 terminal
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal
VIDEO-4 terminal
OUTPUT terminal
Headphone jack
Accessories
Speakers
Power consumption
Screen size
(measured diagonally)
Dimensions(W X H X D)
Weight
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of
copyright.
This TV does not conform to the PAL-D Chinese broadcasting system.
43
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
43
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
HV-34LPZ / HV-29LPZ
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1215-001A-H_p22-44
44
Black
4/11/02, 8:59 AM
COLOUR TELEVISION
HV-34LPZ
HV-29LPZ
Contents
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6
Remote control buttons
and functions . . . 8
Using the TV's menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 18
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 19
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 22
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 24
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 33
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
INSTRUCTIONS
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
1
Black
LCT1217-001A-H
0402-Ki-NV-JMT
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.
To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this
manual thoroughly before you begin.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.
1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.
2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,
grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.
3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.
Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.
When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more
than the minimum distances as shown.
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.
5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.
Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.
6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it
when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,
wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.
Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.
7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to
disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.
2
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
2
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Setting up your TV
CAUTION
• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV
before connecting anything.
1 Connecting the aerial and VCR
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Fig.A
• Read the manual that came with the VCR
before connecting.
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket
on this TV .
Back of the TV
AUDIO
R
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial
input socket on the VCR, and
connect the VCR and TV with
another aerial cable.
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack and the TV's
VIDEO jack with a video cable.
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO
cable:
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and TV's S connector with an SVIDEO cable A , instead of connecting with a
video cable.
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
R AUDIO L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
Fig.B
Back of the TV
A
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with
an audio cable.
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an
audio cable.
• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK
Supported Devices” on page 35.
3
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
3
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Setting up your TV
2 Connecting the power cord
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.
3 Putting the batteries into the
Remote control
Use two AA/R6 batteries.
Insert the batteries from the
end, making sure the
and
polaritiles are correct.
• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.
• If the remote control does not work properly,
replace the batteries.
• The batteries we supply are only for setting up
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon
as necessary.
4 Making the initial settings
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.
1 Press the main power button on the TV
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.
• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does
not change to green, your TV is in the standby
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote
control to turn the TV on.
• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has
already been turned before .In this case,use
the "LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM"
functions to make the initial settings. For details,
see "INSTALL menu" on page 27.
2 Press the MENU/OK button
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
POWER lamp
Main power button
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose
a language for the on-screen language.
LANGUAGE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP.
:BACK
4
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
4
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Setting up your TV
3 Press the / buttons to choose
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK
button.
AUTO PROGRAM
10
20%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RETURN
OK
DISP
PICTURE
MODE
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are automatically
stored in the programme numbers list.
CH
POWER
TV/VIDEO
:OK
0
:BACK
VOLUME
4 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number (PR)
list, the EDIT menu appears.
CHANNEL
MULTI
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,
press the DISPLAY button.
MUTING
EDIT
PIP
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
SUB-P
NEXT
CH/CC
:BACK
PIP
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in
the programme numbers list, you can register
it using the MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store
a TV channel to the programme number 0
(AV).
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL
function, press the MENU/OK button to close
the EDIT menu.
Now, the setting up is complete.
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!
5
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
5
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
TV buttons and functions
Turn the main power on
Press the main power button 1 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is
in the standby mode.
To turn the main power off :
press the main power button again.
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.
Turn the TV on from standby
mode
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and
your TV will be turned on.
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby
mode.
82
1
7
9
Choose a TV channel
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Choose a VIDEO terminal
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Adjust the volume
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .
The volume level indicater appears.
MENU button 6
(Behind the cover)
Press to open the menu.
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on
the TV" on page 17.
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
IN (VIDEO-4)
0
-
R
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
65 43
Remote control sensor
and ECO sensor 9
ECO lamp 7
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.
6
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
6
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
TV buttons and functions
SPATIALIZER lamp 8
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.
Headphone jack 0
AUDIO
R
Connect the headphones with a stereo
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).
When using the headphones, follow the
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 23.
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CB
CR
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
VIDEO-1 terminal =
• See page 3 and 33.
AUDIO
S
L/MONO VIDEO
R
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
L/MONO
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
!
• See page 33.
OUTPUT
@
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal !
• See page 26 and 33.
VIDEO
VIDEO-4 terminal -
AV COMPU LINK
$
VIDEO-2 terminal ~
Y/VIDEO
AUDIO
R
=
~
• See page 33.
#
OUTPUT terminal @
• See page 33.
Aerial socket #
Connect the aerial cable.
• See page 3.
AV COMPU LINK terminal $
• See page 33 and 35.
7
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
7
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Turn the TV on from standby mode
Press the POWER button.
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+
buttons or the number buttons.
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RETURN
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be
turned on.
POWER
TV/VIDEO
To turn the TV off:
Press the POWER button again.
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV
enters standby mode.
0
Choose a TV channel
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has
been set.
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the
programme number (PR) with the number
buttons.
• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry
system.
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.
• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR
SYSTEM button" on page 11.
• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the
picture appears normally, follow the operation
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
Adjust the volume
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.
• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 23.
8
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
8
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Watch images from external
devices
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external
device has been connected.
16:9
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 aspect ratio).
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.
To return to a TV channel:
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+
buttons or the number buttons.
MUTING button
• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect
ratio that have been squeezed into a
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you
can restore their original demensions.
Press the MUTING button to turn off
the volume. Pressing the MUTING
button again resumes the previous
volume level.
SPATIALIZER button
ZOOM button
Press the SPATIALIZER button to
choose a mode.
You can change the screen size according to the
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one
from the following ZOOM modes.
Press the ZOOM button to choose a
mode.
• If you press the ZOOM button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen and
the ZOOM function does not operate.
You can enjoy Surround sound with a
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER
function.
LIVE :
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo
sound converting it into surround sound
with added depth and ambience.
MONO :
Mono allows you to enjoy normal
monaural sound by converting it into a
stereo-like sound.
REGULAR
OFF :
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as
its original size is.
This function is turned off.
• The LIVE mode works properly only
with stereo sound.
• The LIVE mode does not work
correctly with headphones.
ZOOM
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect
ratio) to fill the TV screen.
• The MONO mode works properly only
with monaural sound.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
• The left side and right side of the Wide
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.
9
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
9
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
BASS button
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)
function.
Press the BASS button to turn the
SUPER BASS function on or off.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
PICTURE MODE button
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to
adjust the picture settings automatically.
Press the PICTURE MODE button
choose a mode.
BRIGHT :
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD :
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT :
Softens contrast and sharpness.
RETURN+ button
The RETURN+ button has two functions;
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN
function. If a channel has been registerd as
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+
function operates. If there is no setting for
the "Return Channel", the RETURN
function operates.
RETURN+ function :
By registering a channel you frequently
view as the "Return Channel", you can
select that channel at any time simply by
pressing the RETURN+ button.
To register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
Choose the Programme number to which
the channel you want to register has been
set, and press the RETURN+ button and
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is
displayed and the registration is completed.
To cancel register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
while viewing any TV channel, press the
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS
CANCELED!" is displayed and the registration is cancelled.
• When you turn off the TV, the
registration for the "Return Channel" is
cancelled.
• If you want to view the "Return Channel"
and another TV channel alternately, first
choose a channel other than the
"Return Channel". and then press the
RETURN+ button to change the
channel to the "Return Channel" In this
way, you can view two channels
alternately by pressing the RETURN+
button.
RETURN function :
The TV temporarily memorises the TV
channel that was choosen right before the
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can
alternately view the current TV channel and
the "Last Channel".
• If you want to view two channels
alternately by using the RETURN
function, first choose one TV channel
and then choose the other TV channel
with the Number buttons. If you choose
the TV channel without using the
Number buttons, there are cases where
a channel other than the one you first
chose is registered as the "Last
Channel".
10
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
10
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
/ button
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
Press the
/ button to
choose a sound mode.
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
DISPLAY button
You can display the PR LIST, programme
number or VIDEO terminal number on the
screen.
Press the DISPLAY button.
Press the DISPLAY button changes the
display as follows:
PR LIST
ID
1
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
-10
No indication
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
1 Press the DISPLAY button to
display the PR LIST.
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose a programme number
or VIDEO terminal.
Then press the MENU/OK
button.
• For programme numbers with the
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed
next to the programme number in the PR
LIST.
: Stereo sound
PR
Choose a TV channel or a
VIDEO terminal
• The VIDEO terminals are registered after
the programme number PR99.
COLOUR SYSTEM button
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button
to choose the appropriate colour
system.
AUTO :
This function detects a colour system from
the input signal.
• The AUTO mode may not function
properly if you have poor signal quality.
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO
mode, choose another colour system
manually.
• The AUTO mode detects a colour system
from the input signal and chooses the
appropiate colour system automatically.
• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15
for details.
+10
11
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
11
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
• For the colour systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
SOUND SYSTEM button
The sound system is chosen automatically. However, if you cannot hear the
sound normally even when the picture
appears normally, chooes the sound
system maunually.
Press the SOUND SYSTEM
button to choose the appropriate
sound system.
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS
For sound sysytem colour system in your country
or rigion, refer to the table below.
COLOUR SYSTEM
Area
Middle
China, Vietnam, etc
PAL
East
Hong Kong, etc
PAL
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
Europe
: I system
D/K : D/K system
M
Oceania
: M system
• This function does not work in the
VIDEO mode.
• For the sound systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
Africa
Area
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
NTSC
Russia, etc
SECAM
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
PAL
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
PAL
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
PAL
PAL
Republic of South Africa, etc
PAL
Nigeria, etc
PAL
Egypt, Morocco, etc
SECAM
Country or Region
B/G
China, Vietnam, etc
D/K
Hong Kong, etc
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
B/G
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
M
Russia, etc
D/K
Europe
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
D/K
B/G
Oceania
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
Republic of South Africa, etc
I
B/G
Africa
Nigeria, etc
B/G
Egypt, Morocco, etc
B/G
East
12
12
System
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
Middle
Black
SECAM
SOUND SYSTEM
Asia,
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
System
Asia,
B/G : B/G system
I
Country or Region
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
PAL
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
I
Remote control buttons and functions
FREEZE button
You can view the Main picture's forzen image
as the SUB-picture.
Press the FREEZE button.
Still pictures
MAIN
To cancel the FREEZE function :
Press the FREEZE button again.
• You cannot use the FREEZE button when
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are
displayed on the screen.
• If you press the FREEZE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the FREEZE function does
not operate.
• If you press the STROBE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the screen
and the STROBE function does not operate.
• You cannot change the TINT setting for
the still images on the screen even if you
are viewing a programme with NTSC
colour system.
Using the MULTI
function
You can display multi-pictures that enable
you to easily find a program you want to
view.
1 Press the MULTI button.
Press the MULTI button changes the
display as follow:
5-pictures multi mode
1
2
1
STROBE button
3
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15
consecutive still images.
MAIN
Still
pictures
4
5
Press the STROBE button.
Moving
picture
16-pictures multi mode
Moving
picture
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
16
To cancel the STROBE function:
Still
pictures
Moving
picture
Press the STROBE button to return to the
MAIN-picture.
• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is
weak, the still images become abnormal.
• You cannot use the STROBE button
when the SUB-picture or the MAINpicture are displayed on the screen.
Cancel the MULTI function
To display next Multi pictures :
Press the NEXT button.
13
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
13
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
2 Choose the desired picture with
the / and / buttons, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
The screen switches to the TV channel or
VIDEO mode of your choice.
• Any programme numbers to which no TV
channel has been registered, or
programme numbers to which
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not
displayed.
• You cannot perform menu operations
such as headphone volume adjustment.
Cancel the MULTI function once to
perform menu operations.
• If you press the MULTI button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the MULTI function does not
operate.
Using the PIP function
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at
the same time.
Press the PIP button.
Press the PIP button changes the display as
follows:
Twin pictures mode
2
5
SUB
MAIN
Picture in picture mode
2
SUB
5
MAIN
• During the short period that is required
for the Multi-pictures display to close no
sound comes from the television.
Cancel the PIP function
• You cannot view a picture from the same
programme number (or the same VIDEO
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and
the SUB-picture at the same time.
• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the
quality of the SUB-picture may also be
poor.
• If the picture standards of both pictures
are different, the top and bottom or one of
them may be missing.
• The ZOOM function does not operate
when viewing pictures using the PIP
function.
• The SUB-picture cannot be output from
TV.
• If you press the PIP button when receiving
the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen
and the PIP function does not operate.
14
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
14
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Choose a TV channel for
the SUB-picture
• You cannot change the COLOUR SYSTEM
of the SUB-picture using the COLOUR
SYSTEM button on the remote control.
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.
POSITION button
Listen to the sound of SUBpicture
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on
your headphones while listening to the sound
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.
You can adjust the position of the SUBPicture when using the Picture in picture
mode.
Press the POSITION button
repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, the SUBPicture moves counterclockwise.
Change the colour system
of the SUB-picture
1 While the SUB-picture is displayed, press the MENU/OK
button to display the MENU
(main manu).
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,
and then press the MENU/OK
button.
SWAP button
3 Press the / buttons to
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
Press the SWAP button.
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the
SUB-picture with each other.
COLOUR SYSTEM
MAIN
SUB
NTSC 3.58
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
4 Press the / buttons to
choose SUB, and then press the
/ buttons to choose the
appropriate colour system. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
• Do not press the SWAP button while you
are recording the TV output on the VCR.
If you do, the output signal will change.
15
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
15
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Using the TV's menu
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating
techniques fully.
Basic operation
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display
the MENU (main menu).
MENU
PICTURE SETTING
INSTALL
PICTURE FEATURES
DEMO
SOUND SETTING
9
FEATURES
RETURN
0
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu
indicates buttons on the remote control you
can use when you operate a chosen function.
MENU/OK button
TV
TV/VIDEO button
DISP.
DISPLAY button
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
OK
SWAP
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
2 Press the / and / buttons to
choose a menu title, and press the
MENU/OK button.
The menu appears.
To return to the previous menu:
Press the DISPLAY button.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
To exit a menu instantly:
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
3 Press the
function.
/
buttons to choose a
• For details of the functions in the menus, see
the following pages.
16
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
16
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Using the TV's menu
4 Press the / buttons to
choose the setting of that function.
• If you want to operate a function which
appears only with its name, follow the
descriptions of that function on the
following pages.
5 Press the MENU/OK button to
comple the setting.
The menu disappears.
• When watching the television with the
NTSC system, the menus are displayed
at about half of their normal verical size.
Operation with the
buttons on the TV
You can also operate the menus using the
buttons on the front panel of the TV.
OK
button
/
buttons
/
buttons
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
button
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
• There is no button on the front panel of
the TV that has the function of the
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.
17
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
17
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE SETTING menu
PICTURE SETTING
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
SHARP
COLOUR
TINT
WHITE BALANCE
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
STANDARD
MID
ON
RESET
SHARP
You can adjust the picture sharpness.
: softer
: sharper
• You cannot select the SHARP function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
COLOUR
PICTURE MODE
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs to adjust the picture settings
automatically.
BRIGHT:
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD:
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT:
Softens contrast and sharpness.
• You can also operate the PICTURE
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE
button on the remote control.
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"
on page 10.
Adjusting the picture
You can change the picture settings of each
picture mode as you like. The picture settings
changed are stored in the picture mode.
CONTRAST
You can adjust the picture contrast.
: lower
: higer
BRIGHT
You can adjust the picture brighetness.
: darker
: brighter
You can adjust the picture colour.
: lighter
: deeper
TINT
You can adjust the picture tint.
: reddish
: greenish
• You can change the TINT setting (picture
tint) only when the colour system is
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.
• You cannot select the TINT function when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal).
To return to the default settings
in each PICTURE MODE :
Press the blue button. Returns the picture
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE
MODE mode to the default settings, and
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.
WHITE BALANCE
You can select one of three WHITE
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since
white is the colour which is used as a
refernce for all the other colours, changing
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the
appearance of all the other colours on the
screen.
COOL:
A bluish white. Using this mode when
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy
a more vivid and bright picture.
18
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
18
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE FEATURES menu
MID:
The normal white colour.
PICTURE FEATURES
WARM:
A raddish white. Using this mode when
watching films allows you to enjoy colours
that are characteristic of films.
• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE
function in the Twin pictures mode or the
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON, the screen contrast is automatically adjusted to a setting suitable for the
brightness of your room. This reduces eye
strain for you and the power consumption of
the TV.
DIGITAL VNR
DigiPure
PULL DOWN
COLOUR SYSTEM
ZOOM
PICTIRE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
DIGITAL VNR
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the
amount of noise in the original picture.
• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR
function when receiving the Progressive
Video Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will be automatically adjust the level
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the
best possible picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
DISPLAY :
This function is turned on. Further, clover
marks indicating the brightness of your
room are displayed for several seconds each
time the brightness changes. The number of
clover marks displayed on the screen
increases as your room becomes darker.
• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too
high it can make the picture less sharp.
It is recommended to use the AUTO
setting if you can.
MAX:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
MIN:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness
of the original picture has not been reproduced fully, change the setting from AUTO to
MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
19
LCT1217-001A-H/p1-19
19
Black
4/9/02, 7:10 PM
Using the TV's menu
DigiPure
MIN:
The Digipure function uses the latest in
digital technology to give you a natural
looking picture. The Digipure function
includes the following two functions.
Digipure function:
This function helps to create a natural looking
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges
from high-contrast and crisp images.
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,
edges are added to produce a sharper, more
detailed picture.
You can choose from the DigiPure function
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.
Picture motion compensation
function:
This function displays fast-moving pictures
(for example, the players or ball in a football
game) more smoothly and naturally on the
screen.
• You cannot select the Digipure function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will automatically adjust the level of
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of
noise in the picture, giving the best possible
picture.
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of
noise, this may actually make the noise
worse. It is recommended to use the
AUTO setting if you can.
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the
setting from AUTO to MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain very little
noise.
OFF:
The DigiPure function is turned off.
PULL DOWN
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema
film picture more smoothly and naturally on
the screen.
AUTO:
This function is turned on. Normally keep this
function set to AUTO.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
• The motion may appear unnatural when
viewing images with the NTSC colour
system. To make the motion smoother,
switch the PULL DOWN function from
AUTO to OFF.
• You cannot select this function in the
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in
picture mode.
MAX:
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality
has not been reproduced fully, change the
setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
20
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
20
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
COLOUR SYSTEM
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
You can change the screen size according to
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum
one of three ZOOM modes.
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the
MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
REGULAR
ZOOM
16:9
COLOUR SYSTEM
PAL
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose the appropriate colour
system. Then press the MENU/
OK button.
• When changing to the COLOUR
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see
"Change the colour system of the SUBpicture" on page 15 for details.
• You can also operate the COLOUR
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR
SYSTEM button on the remote control.
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM
button" on page 11.
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a ZOOM mode. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
The picture expands and the chosen
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5
seconds.
• You can choose a ZOOM mode from
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.
• You cannot select the ZOOM function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
PICTURE TILT
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic
force may make the picture tilt. If this
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then
press the MENU/OK button.
PICTURE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons until the
picture becomes level. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
21
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
21
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
SOUND SETTING menu
SOUND SETTING
STEREO/
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
AI VOLUME
BBE
SPATIALIZER
SUPER BASS
HEADPHONE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
MONO
ON
ON
LIVE
ON
STEREO / I•II
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
: Stereo sound
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound to your liking.
BALANCE
You can adjust the volume balance between
the left and right speakers.
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.
AI VOLUME
You can prevent the sudden increase or
decrease of sound that occurs when
changing the channel to another channel or
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO
mode.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.
For example, you can set it to be OFF in
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.
If you set the AI VOLUME function while
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,
the setting is registered as the setting for
VIDEO mode.
• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate
as expected if the sound input level from
a broadcast station (or video software) is
extremely low.
BBE
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easyto-listen sound that is faithful to the original
sound recorded.
BASS
ON :
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
OFF :
TREBLE
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
This function is turned on.
This function is turned off.
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE
is a registered trademark of BBE
Sound, inc.
22
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
22
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's Menu
SPATIALIZER
TV SPEAKER:
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER
modes.
• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "
on page 9.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
SUPER BASS
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)
function.
When this function is on, the TV’s speaker
does not shut off the sound even if headphones are connected.
If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker
does not output the sound when the
headphones are connected.
OUTPUT:
You can choose the sound from the MAINpicture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when
using the headphones.
• The TV’s speaker does not put out the
sound from the SUB-picture.
• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono
only. You cannot use the STEREO / I • II
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
HEADPHONE
This function enables you to output the TV’s
sound from your headphones.
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then
press MENU/OK button.
HEADPHONE
05
ON
MAIN
VOLUME
TV SPEAKER
OUTPUT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Use the / button to select,
and the / button to set the
HEADPHONE function. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
VOLUME :
You can adjust the volume of the sound
output from your headphones.
23
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
23
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
FEATURES menu
BLUE BACK
FEATURES
SLEEP TIMER
BLUE BACK
CHILD LOCK
CHANNEL GUARD
AUTO SHUTOFF
VIDEO-3 SETTING
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
ON
OFF
OFF
COMPONENT
You can set the TV to automatically change
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no
input from an external device.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
SLEEP TIMER
You can set the TV to automatically turn off
after a set time.
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then
press the MENU/OK button.
SLEEP TIMER
0
120
CHILD LOCK
You can disable the front control buttons of
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the
TV can be operated only by using the remoto
control.
Use this function to prevent children from
operating the TV at their own discretion
(without parent consent).
OFF
ON :
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
This function is turned on.
OFF:
2 Press the / buttons to set the
period of time.
The TV begins count down from the set
time.
• You can set the period of time a
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10
minitue steps.
To cancel this function:
Press the button to set a period of time to
"OFF".
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
This function is turned off.
CHANNEL GUARD
When there is a TV channel you do not want
your children to watch, you can lock out the
channel. Even when a child chooses a
programme number for a locked out channel
the screen will change to blue and display
so the channel cannot be viewed.
To set this function
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then
press the number 0 (AV) button.
The menu disappers.
SET ID NO.
• One minute before this function turns off
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.
• This function cannot be used to turn off
the TV's main power.
24
0000
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
• When this function is on, you can display
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm
or change the remaining time.
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
24
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV’s menu
2 Set the ID number you want.
To choose a number:
Press the / buttons.
To view a locked TV
channel
1 Choose a programme number in
which a TV channel locked with
the number buttons or PR LIST.
To move a cursor:
Press the / buttons.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
The screen changes to blue and the
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.
CHANNEL GUARD
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH / CC
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
5
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• You cannot choose a locked TV channel
with the / buttons.
GUARD
4 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
• The TV shows the TV programme which
the chosen TV channel is now
broadcasting.
5 Press the blue button to set this
function to the TV channel.
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the
TV channel is locked.
To cancel this function:
Press the blue button again.
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and
the lock is released.
6 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappears.
2 Press the DISPLAY button to
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber
input screen).
5
ID NO.:
3 Press the number buttons to
enter the ID number.
The lock is temporarily released so you
can view the TV channel.
If you have forgotten the ID number:
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".
After confirming the ID number, press the
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.
• When you would like to cancel the
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must
perform the operation " To set this
function" again.
25
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
25
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
AUTO SHUTOFF
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are
received for about 15 minutes or longer after
the end of a broadcast.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not
turn off the TV's main power.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a
VIDEO mode.
VIDEO-3 SETTING
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly according to the video signal input from the external
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If
this setting is incorrect, images will not be
displayed.
VIDEO :
If a normal video signal (composite video
signal) is input.
COMPONENT :
If a Component video signal (Y/CB/CR
signals) is input.
• For detailed connecting methods, see
" Additional preparation " on page 33.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)
only when the component video signal is
input.
26
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
26
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV’s menu
INSTALL menu
AUTO PROGRAM
CH
INSTALL
LANGUAGE
AUTO PROGRAM
EDIT/MANUAL
OK
DISP
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press
the MENU/OK button.
LANGUAGE
:OK
:EXIT
DISP.
:BACK
:BACK
2 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number
list, the EDIT menu appears.
You can choose the language you want to
use for the on-screen display from the
language list in a menu.
TV
:OK
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,
press the DISPLAY button.
LANGUAGE
OK
10
20%
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a language.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappers.
AUTO PROGRAM
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"
on page 28.
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not
stored in the programme numbers list,
you can register it using the MANUAL
function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page
28.
You can automatically register the TV
channels which can be received well at
your residence in the TV's programme
numbers by performing the following.
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not
store a TV channel to the programme
number 0 (AV).
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK
button to exit from the EDIT menu.
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are
automatically stored in the programme
numbers list.
27
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
27
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
EDIT/MANUAL
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into
two types:
editing of the current programme numbers
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a
TV channel you want to view to the
programme number (MANUAL function).
This function adds a new TV channel in the
current programme numbers list by using the
CH/CC number.
DELETE :
This function deletes a unnecessary TV
Channel.
MANUAL :
CAUTION
• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT
function rewrites the current programme
numbers list.
Resultingly, the programme number of
some of the TV channels will change.
• When a TV channel which has been
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD
function, using the MANUAL function for
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL
GUARD function.
• When a TV channel has already been
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT
function deletes the TV channel.
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then
press the MENU/OK button.
This function manually registers a new TV
channel in a programme number.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
• For programme number PR 0, "AV"
appears in the programme numbers list.
FUNCTIONS
MOVE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the button to start the
MOVE function.
EDIT
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE :
This function changes a programme number
of a TV channel.
ID :
This function registers a Channel name (ID)
to a TV channel.
28
Black
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
21
22
23
24
25
26
CC
01
02
03
:BACK
STORE
2 Follow the operation description
of a function you want to use and
operate the function.
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
ID
DISP
MOVE
28
INSERT:
3 Press the / buttons to
choose a new programme
number.
To cancel the MOVE function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the button to change the
programme number of a TV
channel to a new programme
number.
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV’s menu
ID
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the red button to start the
ID function.
3 Enter a channel name (ID).
Press the / buttons to
choose a character.
press the / buttons to move
the cursor.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
M
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01(B/G)
02
03
SEARCH+
SEARCHFINE+
FINE-
SYSTEM
To cancel the MANUAL function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
3 Press the button to choose the
system (sound system) for a TV
channel you want to register.
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
MANUAL
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• For the sound systems in each country or
region, see the table "BROADCASTING
SYSTEMS" on page 12.
4 Press the green or red button to
search for a TV channel.
To cancel the ID function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the MENU/OK button to
register a channel name to a TV
channel.
DELETE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the yellow button to delete
the TV channel.
The TV channel is deleted from the
programme numbers list.
MANUAL
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number to
which you want to register a new
TV channel.
2 Press the bule button to activate
the MANUAL function.
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV
channel. Then the TV channel is
displayed.
5 Press the green or red button
repeatedly until the to TV channel
you want appears.
If the TV channel reception is poor:
Press the bule or yerrow button to
finetune the TV channel.
If you cannot hear the normal sound
even when the picture of the TV channel
appers normally:
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the
button and choose a SYSTEM that has
normal sound.
6 Press the MENU/OK button and
register the TV channel to a
programme number.
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.
At the right side following the CH/CC
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of
the TV channel appears.
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
29
Black
29
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
INSERT
PREPARATION
• Find the CH/CC number corresponding
to the channel number of the TV channel
from the on page 31.
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number for
which you will register a new TV
channel.
2 Press the green button to start
the INSERT function.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
**
02
03
`-9
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
CH/CC
3 Press the / buttons to
choose "CC" or "CH" according
to the CH/CC number of the TV
channel.
To cancel the INSERT function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the Number buttons to
enter the remaining CH/CC
number.
The TV shifts to registration mode.
When the registration is completed, the
picture of the TV channel appears on the
screen.
• The CH/CC number is a number
indicating the broadcast frequency to the
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV
channel corresponding to the broadcast
frequency indicated by the CH/CC
number, a picture in the no-signal state
appears.
30
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
30
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV’s menu
CH/CC number
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 30, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel
number of the TV channel from this table.
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.
CHINA: The CHINA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in china, etc.
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.
CC
CH 02
CH 03
CH 04
CH 05
CH 06
CH 07
CH 08
CH 09
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16
CH 17
CH 18
CH 19
CH 20
CH 21
CH 22
CH 23
CH 24
CH 25
CH 26
CH 27
CH 28
CH 29
CH 30
CH 31
CH 32
CH 33
CH 34
CH 35
CH 36
CH 37
CH 38
CH 39
CH 40
CH 41
CH 42
CH 43
CH 44
CH 45
CH 46
CH 47
CH 48
CH 49
CH 50
CH 51
CH 52
CH 53
CH 54
CH 55
CH 56
CH 57
CH 58
CH 59
CH 60
CH 61
CH 62
CH 63
CH 64
CH 65
CH 66
CH 67
CH 68
CH 69
CH 70
US
US-2
US-3
US-4
US-5
US-6
US-7
US-8
US-9
US-10
US-11
US-12
US-13
US-14
US-15
US-16
US-17
US-18
US-19
US-20
US-21
US-22
US-23
US-24
US-25
US-26
US-27
US-28
US-29
US-30
US-31
US-32
US-33
US-34
US-35
US-36
US-37
US-38
US-39
US-40
US-41
US-42
US-43
US-44
US-45
US-46
US-47
US-48
US-49
US-50
US-51
US-52
US-53
US-54
US-55
US-56
US-57
US-58
US-59
US-60
US-61
US-62
US-63
US-64
US-65
US-66
US-67
US-68
US-69
CCIR
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
Channel
OIRT
R1
R2
R6
R7
R8
R9
CHINA
DS-1
DS-2
DS-3
DS-7
DS-8
DS-9
DS-10
DS-11
DS-12
Z-8
R10
R11
R12
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
E67
E68
E69
DS-13
DS-14
DS-15
DS-16
DS-17
DS-18
DS-19
DS-20
DS-21
DS-22
DS-23
DS-24
DS-25
DS-26
DS-27
DS-28
DS-29
DS-30
DS-31
DS-32
DS-33
DS-34
DS-35
DS-36
DS-37
DS-38
DS-39
DS-40
DS-41
DS-42
DS-43
DS-44
DS-45
DS-46
DS-47
DS-48
DS-49
DS-50
DS-51
DS-52
DS-53
DS-54
DS-55
DS-56
DS-57
AUSTRALLIA
AU-0
AU-1
AU-2
AU-6
AU-7
AU-8
AU-9
AU-10
AU-11
CC
CC 01
CC 02
CC 03
CC 04
CC 05
CC 06
CC 07
CC 08
CC 09
CC 10
CC 11
CC 12
CC 13
CC 14
CC 15
CC 16
CC 17
CC 18
CC 19
CC 20
CC 21
CC 22
CC 23
CC 24
CC 25
CC 26
CC 27
CC 28
CC 29
CC 30
CC 31
CC 32
CC 33
CC 34
CC 35
CC 36
CC 37
CC 38
CC 39
CC 40
CC 41
CC 42
CC 43
CC 44
CC 45
CC 46
CC 47
CC 48
CC 49
CC 50
CC 51
CC 52
CC 53
CC 54
CC 55
CC 56
CC 57
CC 58
CC 59
CC 60
CC 61
CC 62
CC 63
CC 64
CC 75
CC 76
CC 77
CC 78
CC 79
CC 95
CC 96
CC 97
CC 98
CC 99
US
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1
W+2
W+3
W+4
W+5
W+6
W+7
W+8
W+9
W+10
W+11
W+12
W+13
W+14
W+15
W+16
W+17
W+18
W+19
W+20
W+21
W+22
W+23
W+24
W+25
W+26
W+27
W+28
CCIR
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-20
S-21
S-22
S-23
S-24
S-25
S-26
S-27
S-28
S-29
S-30
S-31
S-32
S-33
S-34
S-35
S-36
S-37
S-38
S-39
S-40
S-41
X
Y
Z
Z+1
Z+2
Channel
OIRT
CHINA
AUSTRALLIA
AU-5
Z-1
Z-2
Z-3
Z-4
AU-5A
Z-5
Z-6
Z-7
DS-6
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Z-13
Z-14
Z-15
Z-16
Z-17
Z-18
Z-19
Z-20
Z-21
Z-22
Z-23
Z-24
Z-25
Z-26
Z-27
Z-28
Z-29
Z-30
Z-31
Z-32
Z-33
Z-34
Z-35
Z-36
Z-37
R3
R4
R5
DS-4
DS-5
AU-3
AU-4
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
31
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
31
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Using the TV's menu
DEMO menu
DEMO
ON
OFF
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
The DEMO function automatically demostrations some of the TV function.
When the DEMO function is set to
ON:
Each time the TV is turned on, the demonstration starts automatically.
If you do not want that to happen, set the
DEMO function to OFF.
1 Press the /
choose ON.
buttons to
To cancel the DEMO function,
choose off.
2 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the settings.
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the
demostration will start.
To stop the demonstration:
Press one of the button on the remote
control.
32
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
32
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Additional preparation
Connecting the external
devices
Connect the devices to the TV, paying
attention to the following connection
diagram.
Before connecting anything:
• Read the manuals provided with the
devices. Depending on the devices, the
connection method may differ from the
figure. In addition, the device settings
may be changed depending on the
connection method to secure proper
operation.
(Behind the cover)
OVER
• Turn off all the devices including the TV.
S
V
L/MONO
R
IN (VIDEO-4)
• The "Specifications" on page 40 contains
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you
are connecting a device not listed in the
following connection diagram, see the
"Specifications" to choose the best
VIDEO terminal.
• Note that connecting cables are not
supplied.
• When connecting devices that are
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported
Devices" on page 35.
AUDIO
R
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
VCR (composite signal)
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
VCR for recording (composite signal)
DVD player (composite signal)
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
DVD player (component video signals;
Y/CB/CR)
TV game (composite signal)
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Camcorder (composite signal)
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Headphones
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
A AV COMPU LINK cable
33
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
33
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Additional preparation
Connecting methods
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack
and the device's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack with a video
cable.
If connecting a device to the TV
with an S-VIDEO cabel :
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks
(L/MONO and R) and the
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R
output) jacks with an audio
cable.
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of
connecting with a video cable.
Note that the connection with a video cable
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO
cable.
If the device's sound output is in
mono :
If connecting a DVD player to the
TV with a component video
cable :
The signals of the images and sound you are
currently viewing with this TV are output
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can
record the currently shown image and sound
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, CB and CR) in
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's
COMPONENT (component video output)
jacks with a component video cables,
instead of connection with a video cable.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPONENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on
page 26.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive video signal (525P signal).
(When the component video signal is
input.)
If you have a DVD player that outputs
Progressive video signals (525P) as a
component video signal, then by
attaching the device to the television with
a component video cable you can see
the actual images that are recorded on a
DVD disc as an original image source.
If connecting a device to the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal
with a video cable :
34
• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack
is indicated by "V".
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with
a video cables.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page
26.
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
34
Black
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.
Connecting devices to the
OUTPUT terminal
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with
a video cable.
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R
input) jacks with an audio cable.
• When you turn off the TV, the signals from
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.
• The component signals input from the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.
Connecting Headphones
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Headphone jack at the TV front panel.
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Additional preparation
Connecting AV COMPU
LINK Supported Devices
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a
system in which related devices are
automatically controlled when you operate
one device.
If you apply this system to the TV, you can
have the TV automatically perform the
required operations by operating one
external device. You don't have to use the
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or
change the VIDEO modes.
Examples of the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system operations
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images
from the device.
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a
VCR, you can view the tape.
Simply by operating the AV Control Receiver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed
correctly.
• The performance of the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system varies
depending on the connected device.
See the device’s instruction manual.
• When you select "TV SOUND" as the
input source with the AV Control
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's
MUTING function automatically operates
and the sound from the TV's speakers is
muted.
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+
buttons or the MUTING button on the
TV's remote control to cancel the MUTING function. You can regain the sound
from the TV's speakers.
Conditions to use the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system
• A device equipped with an AV COMPU
LINK terminal is required.
• You must connect the TV and the device
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable
is unavailable, connect them with a cable
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at
both ends.
• You must connect the device to an
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system will not function
correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the
AV COMPU LINK remote control
system”.
• The TV must be in standby mode (the
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),
the AV COMPU LINK remote control
system does not function.
Setting up the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system
CAUTION:
• With some devices, the setup method
differs from the ones explained here.
Be sure to read the device’s instruction
manual thoroughly before setting it up.
1 Connect the device to the TV’s
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.
If you want to connect a DVD
player to the TV with a component video cable :
Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3
terminal.
• For detailed connecting instructions, see
"Connecting the external devices" on
page 33.
35
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
35
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Additional Preparation
2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU
LINK terminal and the device’s
AV COMPU LINK terminal with
an AV COMPU LINK cable.
3 Change the device’s setting
according to the VIDEO terminal
it is connected to.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-1 terminal :
Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-1 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD2.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD3.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a
component video cable:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD1.
• For instructions on how to change the
device’s setting, refer to the device’s
instruction manual.
• If the device you are connecting has
neither the remote control code nor the
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it
to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.
36
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
36
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Troubleshooting
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think
there is a problem with the TV itself.
Important:
• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.
• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the
rearcover of the TV.
If you cannot turn on
the TV
• Is the AC plug connected to the AC
outlet?
• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the
Main power button.
No picture/No sound
• Have you chosen a TV channel whose
reception is extremely bad? In this case,
the BLUE BACK function will be activated, the entire screen becomes blue, and
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you
want to view the TV channel, follow the
description "BLUE BACK" on page 24 to
try to change the BLUE BACK function
setting to OFF.
• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct?
Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM
Button” on page 12 to try to solve the
trouble.
Poor picture
• If noise totally obscures the picture (snow), the aerial or aerial cable may have
trouble. Check the following to try to
solve the trouble :
Has the TV and aerial been
connected properly?
Has the aerial cable been damaged?
Is the aerial pointed to the right direction?
Is the aerial itself faulty?
• If the TV or aerial receives interference
from the other devices, stripes or noise
may appear in the picture. Move such
device as an amplifier, personal computer, or a hair drier that can cause interference away from your TV, or try changing its location. If the aerial suffers interference from a radio tower or highvoltage wire, please contact your local
dealer.
• If the TV receives interferences from
signal reflecting from mountains or
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will
occur.
Try to change the aerial’s direction or
replace the antenna with the one with
better directionality.
37
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
37
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Troubleshooting
• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct? Follow the
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.
• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controlled properly? Follow the description
"Adjusting the picture" on page 18 to try
to adjust them properly.
• When a white and bright still image (such as a white dress) is displayed on the
screen, the white part may look as if it
were coloured.
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to
the nature of the picture tube itself, and
not due to a TV failure.
When the picture disappears from the
screen, the unnatural colours will also
disappear.
• When viewing images from commercially
available video softwear products, or videos from videotapes which have been
recored improperly, the top of the image
may be distored.
This is due to the condition of the video
signal, and not because of malfunction.
Poor sound
• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE
properly? If not, follow the description
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 22 to try
to adjust them properly.
• Have you attempted to use the remote
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at
a location more than seven meters apart
from the TV location? Operate the remote
control in the front of your TV or a
location less than seven meters from
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.
• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,
you cannot operate the TV with the front
control buttons of the TV. Follow the
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 24
to try to set the CHILD LOCK function to
OFF.
• If the TV operation becomes disabled
suddenly, press the Main power button
on the TV and turn off the main power.
Try to press the Main power button again
to turn on the main power. If the TV
returns to a normal state, it is not a
failure.
• The following functions do not operate
when receiving Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal);
Remote control function:
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and
STROBE BUTTON
MENU function:
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure
and ZOOM
• When the TV channel reception is poor, it
can be hard to hear the stereo or
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the
description "STEREO / I • II" on page 22
to hear the sound more easily by
changing it to a mono sound.
Operation disabled
• Have the batteries of the remote control
become exhausted?
Follow the description "Putting the
Batteries into the Remote Control" on
page 4 and replace them with new
batteries to try solve the problem.
38
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
38
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Troubleshooting
Other concerns
• When the SLEEP TIMER function or AUTO
SHUTOFF function operates, the TV is
automatically turned off.
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to press
the POWER button to turn on the TV once
again. At this time, if the TV resumes a
normal state, there is no problem.
• Touching the screen may cause you feel
a slight electric shock due to its static
electricity.
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to
the construction of the picture tube. It is
not a problem with the TV.
You can rest assured that this static discharge does not have harmful influence
over the human boby.
• If you do not want sound emitted from the
TV’s speakers when using headphones,
change the TV SPEAKER setting in the
HEADPHONE menu to OFF. For details,
see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.
• If you bring a magnetised device such
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture
may be warped or unnatural colours
appear at the corners of the screen.
In this case, keep the device apart from
your TV. If the speaker causes such
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded
speaker instead.
• A picture may be tilted due to the influence of the earth's magnetism. In this
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page
21 to complete the tilt.
• It takes a short period of time from the
time an operation such as changing
channels is performed until an image is
displayed. This is not a malfunction.
This is the time required for the image to
stabilize before it can be displayed.
• The TV may emit a crackling sound due
to a sudden change in temperature. It
does not matter if a picture or sound
does not show any abnormality. If you
hear crackling sounds frequently while
you are viewing the TV, other causes may
be assumed.
For precautionary purposes, request
your service technician to inspect it.
39
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
39
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
Specifications
Broadcasting systems
Colour systems
Channels and frequencies
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz
UHF channel (U)
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.
RCA connector X 5
• Video input/Component video (Y/CB/CR) input and Audio
L/R inputs are available.
• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C215)
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm
HV-34LPZ : 75kg
HV-29LPZ : 48kg
Sound-multiplex systems
Power requirements
Audio output
VIDEO-1 terminal
VIDEO-2 terminal
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal
VIDEO-4 terminal
OUTPUT terminal
Headphone jack
Accessories
Speakers
Power consumption
Screen size
(measured diagonally)
Dimensions(W X H X D)
Weight
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of
copyright.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
40
LCT1217-001A-H/p20-40
40
Black
4/9/02, 7:11 PM
HV-34LPZ
HV-29LPZ
................... 3
............. 6
............. 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 1
ブラック
LCT1217-001A-H
0402-Ki-NV-JMT
02.3.28, 5:10 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
非常感謝您惠購此JVC牌彩色電視機。
請在使用前熟讀此使用說明書,以掌握新電視機的使用方法。
警告:
為了防止發生火災或觸電的危險,請勿將本機曝露於雨中或受潮。
注意:
為了保證人身安全,請遵守下列有關使用本機的注意事項。
1 僅在電視機背面所示的電源範圍內使用。
2 防止損壞電源線和插頭。從電視機上拔下插頭時,請抓住插頭,勿拉電
源線。
3 切勿堵塞或遮蓋通風口。
切勿將本機放置在通風不良之處。
安裝電視機時,在電視機周圍應留有大於圖示的最小距離的空間,以便
通風。
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
4 請勿讓物體或液體進入本機的縫隙內。
5 本機發生故障時,請拔下插頭,讓維修服務人員修理。
請勿自行維修或拆下後蓋。
6 電視屏幕的表面易於損壞。操作電視機時請多加小心。如果電視屏幕弄
髒時,請用乾的軟布擦拭。切勿用力摩擦。切勿使用任何清潔劑或去垢
劑。
7 長期不使用電視機時,請務必將電源插頭從交流電源插座上撥下。
2
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 2
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:10 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
安裝電視機
注意
• 連接前,請關閉包括本機在內的所有設備。
1 連接天線和錄像機
• 未附帶天線。請使用優質的75歐姆同軸線。
• 連接前,請閱讀錄像機的使用說明書。
圖A
如果不連接VCR
(錄像機)
時
(參照圖A)
:
請將天線與電視機的天線插座連接。
如果連接VCR時(參照圖B)
:
1 將天線與VCR的天線輸入插座連接,
並用另一根天線連接VCR和電視機。
2 用視頻電纜將VCR的VIDEO OUT
(視頻輸出)插口和電視機的VIDEO
(視頻)插口連接起來。
R
3 用音頻電纜將VCR的VIDEO OUT
(音頻L/R輸出)插口和電視機的
AUDIO(音頻)插口(L/MONO和
R)連接起來。
• 如果VCR的音頻輸出為單聲道時,請用音頻
電纜將VCR的AUDIO OUT(音頻輸出)插口
和電視機的AUDIO L/MONO插口連接起來。
• 如果VCR帶有AV COMPU LINK端子,則可
使用AV COMPU LINK功能。詳細說明,請
參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV COMPU
LINK的裝置”。
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
R AUDIO L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
用S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)電纜連接VCR和電視
機時:
用S-VIDEO電纜A來代替視頻電纜,將VCR的
S-VIDEO OUT(超級-視頻輸出)接口與電視機
的S接口連接起來。
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
圖B
A
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
3
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 3
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
安裝電視機
2 連接電源線
將插頭插入交流電源插座。
3 將電池裝入遙控器
請使用兩節AA/R6/5號電池。
從負.極裝入電池,請勿搞錯正,極和負.極。
• 請遵守印刷在電池上的警告事項。
• 如果遙控器工作不正常,請更換電池。
• 附帶的電池僅供安裝和測試電視機之用,請盡
快換上新電池。
4 初始設定
首次打開電視機時,將進入初始設定模式,顯示
JVC標記。
1 按下電視機上的主電源按鈕。
打開電視機,顯示JVC標記。
• 如果電視機上的電源指示燈保持紅色而不變成
綠色,則說明電視機處在待機狀態。請按下遙
控器上的POWER按鈕來打開電視機。
• 如果不出現JVC標記,則說明電視機已被打開
過。此時,請利用“語言”和“自動程序”功
能進行初始設定。詳細說明,請參閱第27頁
上的“導入菜單”。
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
2 按下MENU/OK按鈕。
出現語言菜單。可選擇用於在屏幕上顯示的語
言。
POWER指示燈
主電源按鈕
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
4
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 4
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
安裝電視機
3 按下 / 按鈕,選擇中文。然後按
下MENU/OK按鈕。
自動程序功能啟動。
接收到的電視頻道被自動登錄在節目號碼一覽
內。
CH
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
:
DISP.
:
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20%
OK
POWER
TV/VIDEO
RETURN
0
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
• 要取消自動程序功能時,請按下DISPLAY按
鈕。
MUTING
4 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼(编排)
一覽內後,出現编缉菜單。
PIP
SUB-P
NEXT
CH/CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
PIP
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
OK
TV
DISP.
• 可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一覽。詳
細說明,請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
• 如果想觀看的電視頻道未被存儲在節目號碼一
覽內,請利用手動功能將其登錄。詳細說明請
參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。
• 自動程序功能不會將電視頻道存儲在節目號碼
0(AV)內。
• 如果無需使用編輯/手動功能時,請按下
MENU/OK按鈕,關閉編輯菜單。
安裝結束,請欣賞新的JVC 電視機。
5
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 5
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
電視機按鈕和功能
打開主電源
按下主電源按鈕 1。
POWER指示燈 2 亮紅燈,電視機變為待機模
式。
關閉主電源:
再次按下主電源按鈕。
POWER指示燈 2 熄滅。
從待機模式打開電視機
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。
POWER指示燈 2 從紅色變為綠色,電視機被
打開。
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
• 在待機模式時,按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 也
可打開電視機。
選擇電視頻道
82
1
7
9
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。
選擇視頻端子
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 或CHANNEL
m 按鈕 5。
調節音量
按下VOLUME m 按鈕 4。
出現音量水準指示器。
MENU按鈕 6
按下可打開菜單。
詳細說明,請參閱第17頁上的“用電視機上的
按鈕進行操作”。
(蓋板後面)
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
R
IN (VIDEO-4)
0
-
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
65 43
遙控器電子眼和ECO電子眼 9
ECO指示燈 7
如果將數字ECO電子眼功能設為開或顯示,則
ECO指示燈將亮燈。
SPATIALIZER指示燈 8
如果將環繞控制鍵功能設為單聲道或現場,則
SPATIALIZER指示燈將亮燈。
6
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 6
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
電視機按鈕和功能
耳機插口 0
將耳機與立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)相
連。
使用耳機時,請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的
步驟操作。
VIDEO-1端子 =
• 請參閱第3頁和第33頁。
AUDIO
R
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CB
CR
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO-2端子 ~
AV COMPU LINK
• 請參閱第33頁。
AUDIO
S
L/MONO VIDEO
R
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
R
L
AUDIO
=
~
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
!
OUTPUT
@
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
端子 !
• 請參閱第26頁和第33頁。
VIDEO-4端子 • 請參閱第33頁。
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
OUTPUT端子 @
$
#
• 請參閱第33頁。
天線插座 #
連接天線。
• 請參閱第3頁。
AV COMPU LINK端子 $
• 請參閱第33頁和第35頁。
7
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 7
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
從待機模式打開電視機
按下POWER按鈕。
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
• 按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按
鈕也可從待機模式打開電視機。
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RETURN
POWER指示燈從紅色變為綠色,電視機被打開。
POWER
TV/VIDEO
關閉電視機:
再次按下POWER按鈕。
POWER指示燈從綠色變為紅色,電視機進入待機模式。
0
選擇電視頻道
選擇已設定電視頻道的節目號碼。
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕或用數字按鈕輸入節
目號碼(编排)。
• 如要將兩位數輸入電視機,請按下-/--按鈕,改為兩位
數輸入系統。
PIP
SUB-P
• 可從編排一覽中選擇頻道。詳細說明,請參閱第11頁
上的“DISPLAY(顯示)按鈕”。
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• 如果畫面不清晰或無色彩時,請按照第11頁上的
“COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色制式)按鈕”的步驟操
作。
• 如果即使正常顯示圖像,也不能正常聽見聲音時,請
按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM(聲音制式)按
鈕”的步驟操作。
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
調節音量
按下VOLUME m 按鈕。
• 不可調節耳機的音量。請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的
操作步驟操作。
觀看來自外接裝置的圖像
選擇連接著外接裝置的VIDEO端子。
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。
• 可用CHANNEL m 按鈕或從編排一覽選擇VIDEO端
子。
調回電視頻道:
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按鈕。
8
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 8
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
MUTING(靜音)按鈕
16:9
按下MUTING按鈕,關閉音量。再次按
下MUTING按鈕,可恢復至原先的音
量。
此模式將普通畫面(4:3縱橫比)轉變為
寬屏幕畫面(16:9縱橫比)。
ZOOM(鏡頭)按鈕
可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請從下列鏡頭
模式中選擇最合適的一個。
按下ZOOM按鈕,選擇一個模式。
• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時按下ZOOM按鈕,則會在屏幕上顯示
“525P”,鏡頭功能不起作用。
常规
用於以原有尺寸觀看普通圖像(4:3縱橫比)。
• 用於被壓縮成普通畫面(4:3縱橫比)
的16:9縱橫比的畫面時,可恢復原來
尺寸。
SPATIALIZER(環繞控制
鍵)按鈕
利用環繞控制鍵功能,可欣賞帶有“現
場”效果的環繞聲音。
按下SPATIALIZER按鈕,選擇模
式。
现场:
利用現場模式,可欣賞被轉換成帶有深度
和周圍環境的環繞聲音的普通立體聲。
镜头
可將寬屏幕圖像(16:9縱橫比)充滿電視屏幕。
单声道:
利用單聲道模式,可欣賞被轉換成像立體
聲的普通單聲。
关:
環繞控制鍵功能不工作。
• 寬屏幕圖像(16:9縱橫比)的左側和右側將被
去掉。
• 現場模式僅在立體聲時正常工作。
• 使用耳機時,現場模式不能正常工
作。
• 單聲道模式僅在單聲時正常工作。
SPATIALIZER係經Desper
Products,Inc.公司授權製造。
9
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 9
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
BASS(低音)按鈕
利用超重低音(超重低音回聲)功能,可
欣賞強勁有力的低音。
按下BASS按鈕,打開或關閉超重
低音功能。
开:
打開此功能。
关:
將電視頻道登錄為“調回頻道”:
選擇已設定節目號碼的需登錄頻道的節目
號碼,並持續按住RETURN+按鈕3秒鐘
以上。將顯示“快退已設定!”,登錄結
束。
取消“調回頻道”的登錄:
觀看任一電視頻道時,持續按住RETURN+
按鈕3秒鐘以上。將顯示“快退已取消!”,
登錄被取消。
• 關閉電視機時,“調回頻道”的登錄被
取消。
關閉此功能。
PICTURE MODE(畫面模
式)按鈕
可選擇三種畫面模式(三種畫面設定)中
的一種,自動調節畫面設定。
按下PICTURE MODE按鈕,選擇
模式。
亮度:
增強對比度和銳度。
• 如想交替觀看“調回頻道”和另一電視
頻道,請先選擇不是“調回頻道”的頻
道,然後按下RETURN+按鈕,將頻道
轉換為“調回頻道”。用這一方法,僅
需按下RETURN+按鈕,便可交替觀看
兩個頻道。
頻道調回功能:
電視機將當前電視頻道前選擇的電視頻道
作為“最後頻道”暫時記憶下來。按下
RETURN+按鈕,可交替觀看當前電視頻
道和“最後頻道”。
• 如想利用頻道調回功能交替觀看兩個頻
道,請先選擇一個電視頻道,然後用數
字按鈕選擇另一個電視頻道。如未用數
字按鈕選擇電視頻道,則有可能不是將
您先選擇的頻道登錄為“最後頻道”。
普通:
標準畫面調節。
柔和:
使對比度和銳度變得柔和。
RETURN+(頻道調回+)
按鈕
RETURN+按鈕具有兩個功能:頻道調回
+功能和頻道調回功能。如果某個頻道被
登錄為“調回頻道”,則頻道調回+功能
起作用。如未設定“調回頻道”,則頻道
調回功能起作用。
頻道調回+功能:
將經常觀看的頻道登錄為“調回頻道”,
可在任何時候僅需按下RETURN+按鈕,
就可選擇此頻道。
10
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 10
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
/ 按鈕
選擇電視頻道或視頻端子
觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時,可從雙重語
言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)或雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音
Ⅱ)中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不
理想時,可將立體聲改變為單聲,以便更清
楚地收聽廣播。
按下
式。
/ 按鈕,選擇聲音模
1 按下DISPLAY按鈕,顯示编排一
览。
2 按下 / 和 / 按鈕,選擇節
目號碼或視頻端子。
然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。
: 立體聲
• 對於設有頻道鎖定功能的節目號碼,則會
在編排一覽中的節目號碼旁顯示 (頻道
鎖定)標記。
: 單聲
• 視頻端子登錄在節目號碼編排 99之後。
: 雙重語言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)
: 雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音Ⅱ)
單聲道 : 取消多聲道功能,聲音變成單聲
道。
• 可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。
• 在視頻模式時,此功能不起作用。
COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色制
式)按鈕
自動選擇彩色制式。但是,如果圖像不清晰
或無色彩,請手動選擇彩色制式。
按下COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕,選
擇合適的彩色制式。
DISPLAY(顯示)按鈕
自动:
可在屏幕上顯示編排一覽、節目號碼或視頻
端子號碼。
此功能從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式。
按下DISPLAY 按鈕。
按下DISPLAY按鈕,如下所示地變換顯示:
• 如果信號品質不佳,則自動功能可能不能
正常發揮作用。如在自動功能時畫面不理
想,請手動選擇其他彩色制式。
• 自動模式從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式,並
自動選擇合適的彩色制式。
-10
• 需改變子畫面的彩色制式時,請參閱第
15頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”的
詳細說明。
1
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OK
:
TV
:
+10
• 有關各國或各地區的彩色制式,請參閱第
12頁上的“廣播制式”。
11
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 11
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
SOUND SYSTEM(聲音制
式)按鈕
自動選擇聲音制式。但是,當畫面正常而卻
不能正常地收聽聲音時,請手動選擇聲音制
式。
廣播制式
有關所在國家或地區的聲音制式和彩色制
式,請參閱下表。
按下SOUND SYSTEM按鈕,選擇
合適的聲音制式。
PAL
B/G :B/G制式
I
PAL
PAL
:I制式
SECAM
D/K :D/K制式
M
NTSC
:M制式
SECAM
PAL
• 在視頻模式時此功能不起作用。
PAL
• 有關各國或各地區的聲音制式,請參閱
第12頁上的“廣播制式”。
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
SECAM
B/G
D/K
I
B/G
M
D/K
D/K
B/G
I
B/G
I
B/G
B/G
12
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 12
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
FREEZE(畫面暫停)按鈕
可像子畫面一樣觀看主畫面的暫停圖像。
按下FREEZE按鈕。
• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P
信號)時按下STROBE按鈕,則會在屏幕
上顯示“525P”,頻閃功能不起作用。
• 即使是觀看NTSC彩色制式的節目,也不
能改變對屏幕上的靜態圖像的色彩微調
設定。
■使用多畫面功能
取消畫面暫停功能:
可顯示多個畫面,以便易於找到所需觀看的
節目。
再次按下FREEZE按鈕。
1 按下MULTI按鈕。
• 當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時,不
可使用FREEZE按鈕。
• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P
信號)時按下FREEZE按鈕,則會在屏幕
上顯示“525P”,畫面暫停功能不起作
用。
按下MULTI按鈕,如下所示地改變顯
示。
5
1
2
1
3
4
STROBE(頻閃)按鈕
5
可以15張連續的靜止圖像方式觀看主畫面。
按下STROBE按鈕。
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
16
取消頻閃功能:
按下STROBE按鈕,回到主畫面。
• 如果主畫面的信號水準較弱,則靜止圖
像不正常。
顯示下一個多畫面:
按下NEXT按鈕。
• 當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時,不
可使用STROBE按鈕。
13
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 13
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
2 用 / 和 / 按鈕,選擇所需
畫面,然後按下MENU/OK按
鈕。
屏幕跳至所選的電視頻道或視頻模式。
■使用PIP功能
可同時觀看兩個畫面(主畫面和子畫面)。
按下PIP按鈕。
按下PIP按鈕,如下所示地改變顯示:
• 不顯示未登錄電視頻道的節目號碼或設
定頻道鎖定的節目號碼。
• 不能進行耳機音量調節等菜單操作。請
先取消多畫面功能後,再進行菜單操
作。
2
5
• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P
信號)時按下MULTI按鈕,則會在屏幕
上顯示“525P”,多畫面功能不起作
用。
• 關閉多畫面顯示的一瞬間,電視機不發
出聲音。
2
5
PIP
• 不可同時從主畫面和子畫面觀看同一節
目號碼(或同一視頻端子)的圖像。
• 如果主畫面信號不佳,則子畫面的信號
品質可能也較差。
• 如果兩個畫面的畫面標準不同,則頂部
和底部或其中之一可能會沒有。
• 用PIP功能觀看畫面時,鏡頭功能不起作
用。
• 不能從電視機輸出子畫面。
• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P
信號)時按下PIP按鈕,則會在屏幕上顯
示“525P”,PIP功能不起作用。
14
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 14
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
遙控器按鈕和功能
為子畫面選擇電視頻道
POSITION(位置)按鈕
按下SUB-P m 按鈕。
利用畫中畫模式時,可調節子畫面的位置。
反復按下POSITION按鈕。
收聽子畫面的聲音
在收聽機內揚聲器發出的主畫面的聲音的同
時,可用耳機收聽子畫面的聲音。
詳細說明,請參閱第23頁上的“耳機”。
每按一次POSITION按鈕,子畫面按逆時針
方向移動一次。
改變子畫面的彩色制式
1 顯示子畫面時,按下MENU/OK按
鈕,顯示菜单(主菜單)。
2 按下 / 和 / 按鈕,選擇画面
特征,然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。 SWAP(交換)按鈕
3 按下 / 按鈕,選擇彩色制式,然 可將主畫面和子畫面互換。
後按下MENU/OK按鈕。
按下SWAP按鈕。
NTSC 3.58
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
4 按下 / 按鈕,選擇子画面,然後
按下 / 按鈕,選擇合適的彩色制
式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。
• 不能用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕
改變子畫面的彩色制式。
• 在將電視機輸出錄製在錄像機上時,請
勿按下SWAP按鈕。如果按下SWAP按
鈕,將會改變輸出信號。
15
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 15
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
本電視機有許多可利用菜單進行操作的功能。
為了充分利用電視機的所有功能,需徹底理解基本的菜單操作技術。
基本操作
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RETURN
1 按下MENU/OK按鈕,顯示菜单(主
菜單)。
0
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
• 菜單底部的顯示說明操作所選功能時可使用的
遙控器的按鈕。
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
OK
MENU/OK
TV
TV/VIDEO
DISP.
DISPLAY
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
2 按下 / 和 / 按鈕,選擇菜單標
題,並按下MENU/OK按鈕。
出現菜單。
返回到前一菜單:
按下DISPLAY按鈕。
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
立刻退出菜單:
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。
3 按下
/
按鈕,選擇功能。
• 有關菜單中的功能的詳細說明,請參閱下一頁
開始的說明。
16
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 16
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
4 按下 /
設定。
按鈕,選擇該功能的
• 如要操作僅顯示名字的功能,請根據下
一頁開始的該功能的說明進行操作。
5 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
菜單消失。
• 觀看NTSC制式的電視時,菜單顯示在正
常垂直尺寸的約一半處。
用電視機上的按鈕進行操作
也可利用電視機前面板上的按鈕操作菜單。
OK
/
/
TV/VIDEO
按鈕
按鈕
按鈕
按鈕
CHANEL
VOLUME
MENU
OK
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
• 在電視機前面板上沒有具有DISPLAY或
色彩按鈕功能的按鈕。
17
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 17
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
畫面設定菜單
亮度
可調節畫面亮度。
:較暗淡
:較明亮
銳度
ECO
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
■畫面模式
可調節畫面銳度。
:較柔和
:較尖銳
• 在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時,不能選擇畫面銳度功能。
可選擇三種畫面模式中的一種,自動調節畫
面設定。
亮度:
色彩
可調節畫面色彩。
:較淡
:較濃
增強對比度和銳度。
普通:
標準畫面調節。
色彩微調
柔和:
可調節畫面色彩微調。
:偏紅
:偏綠
使對比度和銳度變得柔和。
• 也可用遙控器上的PICTURE MODE按鈕
操作畫面模式。
詳細說明,請參閱第10頁上的
“PICTURE MODE(畫面模式)按鈕”。
■畫面調節
可根據需要,改變各畫面模式的畫面設定。
改變的畫面設定被存儲於畫面模式內。
系統組成
• 僅當彩色制式為NTSC 3.58或NTSC 4.43
時,可改變畫面色彩微調設定。
• 在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時,不能選擇畫面色彩微調功能。
返回到各画面模式的默認設定值:
按下藍色按鈕。將當前選擇的畫面模式中的
畫面設定值返回到默認設定值,並將其再次
存儲於畫面模式內。
可調節畫面對比度。
:較低
:較高
18
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 18
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■黑白對比
畫面特征菜單
可選擇三種黑白對比模式(白色的三種色
度)中的一種,調節畫面的黑白對比。因為
白色被用於作為所有其他各種色彩的基準,
所以改變黑白對比模式將影響屏幕上的所有
其他各種色彩。
VNR
DigiPure
PULL DOWN
OK
灰暗:
藍白色。觀看明亮圖像時使用這一模式,可
欣賞生動明快的畫面。
普通:
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
■數字VNR
數字VNR功能會減少原來圖像的噪音量。
普通白色。
• 在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時,不能選擇數字VNR功能。
暖色:
紅白色。觀看影片時使用這一模式,可欣賞
影片所特有的色彩。
• 在雙畫面模式或鏡頭功能的16:9模式
時,不能選擇黑白對比功能。
■數字ECO電子眼
如將數字ECO電子眼功能設定為開,則將根
據房間的亮度自動調節屏幕的對比度。這可
減輕眼睛疲勞並可節省電視機的電力。
开:
數字ECO電子眼功能工作。
自动:
電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節數字
VNR的效果,以顯示最佳畫面。
• 如果數字VNR效果設得太高,則會使畫
面銳度太低。如有可能,推薦利用自動
設定。
最大:
將數字VNR效果設為最大。若將數字VNR功
能設定為自動但感到仍有噪音時,請將設定
從自動改為最大。
• 最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質
圖像。
关:
數字ECO電子眼功能不工作。
最小:
显示:
將數字 VNR 效果設為最小。若將數字VNR
功能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像
的銳度時,請將設定從自動改為最小。
ECO電子眼功能工作。每當房間亮度變化
時,表示房間亮度的三葉草標記
會顯示幾
秒鐘。房間變暗時,顯示在屏幕上的三葉草
標記會增加。
• 最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質
圖像。
19
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p1-19
Page 19
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:11 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■ DigiPure
■PULL DOWN
DigiPure功能利用最新數字技術,使畫面顯
得自然。DigiPure功能包括下列兩個功能。
利用PULL DOWN功能可在屏幕上更清楚自
然地顯示影片畫面。
DigiPure 功能:
自动:
此功能透過去除高對比度和鮮明圖像的無需
的邊角,使畫面顯得自然。
而對於低對比度的圖像,則添加邊角,以變
得更尖銳更清晰。
可從自動、最小和最大中選擇DigiPure功能
的設定值。
下拉功能工作。一般將此功能設為自動。
关:
下拉功能不工作。
畫面移動補償功能:
• 觀看NTSC彩色制式的動態圖像時可能會
顯得不自然。為使動態圖像更清楚,請
將PULL DOWN功能從自動改為關。
此功能可在屏幕上自然地顯示快速移動的圖
像(例如足球場上的球員或足球)。
• 在雙畫面模式或畫面模式為畫面時不能
選擇此功能。
• 在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時,不能選擇DigiPure功能。
自动:
電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節
DigiPure的效果,以顯示最佳畫面。
• 如對帶有許多噪音的低質圖像將DigiPure
效果設得太高,則可能會使噪音惡化。
如有可能,推薦利用自動設定。
最大:
將DigiPure效果設為最大。若將DigiPure功
能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像的
品質時,請將設定從自動改為最大。
• 最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質
圖像。
最小:
將DigiPure效果設為最小。若將DigiPure功
能設定為自動但感到有噪音時,請將設定從
自動改為最小。
• 最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質
圖像。
关:
DigiPure功能不工作。
20
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 20
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■彩色制式
自動選擇彩色制式。但是,如果畫面不清晰
或無色彩,請手動選擇彩色制式。
1 選擇彩色制式,然後按下MENU/
OK按鈕。
2 按下 / 按鈕,選擇镜头模
式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。
畫面擴展,並顯示所選的鏡頭模式約5秒
鐘。
• 可從常規、鏡頭或16:9模式中選擇鏡頭
模式。詳細說明,請參閱第9頁上的
“ZOOM(鏡頭)按鈕”。
• 在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信
號)時,不能選擇鏡頭功能。
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
■畫面糾正
2 按下 / 按鈕,選擇合適的彩色
制式。然後按下MENU/OK按
鈕。
• 改變子畫面的彩色制式時,請參閱第15
頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”詳細
說明。
• 可用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕
操作彩色制式功能。詳細說明,請參閱
第11頁上的“COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色
制式)按鈕”。
■鏡頭
可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請選擇三
種鏡頭模式中的最合適的一種。
有的地方地球的磁力會使畫面歪斜。此時,
可將其糾正。
1 選擇画面纠正,然後按下MENU/
OK按鈕。
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
2 按下 / 按鈕,直至畫面變得
水平。然後按下MENU/OK按
鈕。
1 選擇镜头,然後按下MENU/OK
按鈕。
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
21
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 21
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
聲音設定菜單
平衡
可在左右揚聲器間調節音量的平衡。
:提高左揚聲器的音量。
:提高右揚聲器的音量。
BBE
■自動音控
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
■立體聲/Ⅰ•Ⅱ
當從一個頻道變到另一個頻道或從一種視頻
模式變為另一種視頻模式時,可防止聲音突
然變高或變低。
开:
觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時,可從雙重語
言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)或雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音
Ⅱ)中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不
理想時,可將立體聲改變為單聲,以便更清
楚地收聽廣播。
:立體聲
:單聲
:雙重語言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)
:雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音Ⅱ)
單聲道 :取消多聲道功能,聲音變成單聲
道。
• 可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。
• 在視頻模式時,此功能不起作用。
■聲音調節
自動音控功能工作。
关:
自動音控功能不工作。
• 可分別對電視模式和視頻模式設定自動
音控功能。例如,可對電視模式設定為
關,而對視頻模式設定為開。如果在觀
看來自視頻端子的圖像時設定自動音控
功能,則此設定值被登錄為對視頻模式
的設定。
• 如果來自廣播電台(或視頻軟體)的聲
音輸入水準極低,則自動音控功能可能
不理想。
■ BBE
可利用BBE功能,欣賞易於收聽並忠實於所
錄製的原有聲音的聲音。
开:
可根據需要調節聲音。
BBE功能工作。
低音
关:
可調節聲音的低音。
:較弱
:較強
BBE功能不工作。
經BBE Sound,Inc.許可。BBE是
BBE Sound,Inc.的注冊商標。
高音
可調節聲音的高音。
:較弱
:較強
22
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 22
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■環繞控制鍵
音量:
利用環繞控制鍵功能,可欣賞帶有“現場”
效果的環繞聲音。可選擇兩種環繞控制鍵模
式之一。
• 可從現場、單聲道和關中選擇環繞控制
鍵模式。詳細說明,請參閱第9頁上的
“SPATIALIZER(環繞控制鍵)按鈕”。
SPATIALIZER係經Desper
Products,Inc.公司授權製造。
可調節從耳機輸出的音量。
机内扬声器:
當此功能為開時,則即使連接耳機時也不關
閉機內揚聲器。
如將此功能為關,則當連接耳機時機內揚聲
器不輸出聲音。
输出:
使用耳機時,可選擇主畫面或子畫面的聲
音。
■超重低音
• 機內揚聲器不輸出子畫面的聲音。
利用超重低音(超重低音回聲)功能,可欣
賞強勁有力的低音。
• 子畫面的音響衹能為單聲道。對於子畫
面的音響不能使用立體聲/Ⅰ•Ⅱ功能。
开:
超重低音功能工作。
关:
超重低音功能不工作。
■耳機
利用耳機功能可將電視聲音從耳機輸出。
1 選擇耳机,然後按下MENU/OK
按鈕。
05
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
2 按下 / 按鈕進行選擇,按下
/ 按鈕設定耳机功能。然後按
下MENU/OK按鈕。
23
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 23
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
便利功能菜單
■藍背景
可將電視機設定為當信號較弱或無信號或者
當外接裝置無輸入時自動變為藍背景,並靜
音。
开:
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
藍背景功能工作。
关:
藍背景功能不工作。
■睡眠鐘
可將電視機設定為經過一段指定時間後自動
關閉。
1 選擇睡眠钟,然後按下MENU/
OK按鈕。
0
120
■童鎖
可使電視機的前面控制按鈕無效。將這一功
能設定為開時,僅能用遙控器操作電視機。
利用這一功能可防止兒童自行(未得到父母
同意)操作電視機。
开:
童鎖功能工作。
2 按下
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
/
关:
童鎖功能不工作。
按鈕,設定時間。
電視機開始從設定時間倒計數。
• 可以10分鐘為間隔設定時間,最大可設
為120分鐘(兩個小時)。
取消睡眠定時器功能:
按下 按鈕,將時間設為“關”。
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
菜單消失。
• 由睡眠鐘功能關閉電視機的前一分鐘,
會顯示“晚安!”。
• 睡眠鐘功能不能用於關閉電視機的主電
源。
■頻道鎖定
如有不希望讓兒童觀看的電視頻道,可鎖定
電視頻道。兒童選擇被鎖定的電視頻道所登
錄的節目號碼時,屏幕會變成藍色,並顯示
,而不能觀看此電視頻道。
設定頻道鎖定功能
1 選擇频道锁定,然後按下數字0
(AV)按鈕。
0000
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
• 設定睡眠鐘功能後,可再次顯示睡眠鐘
功能菜單,以確認或改變剩餘時間。
24
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 24
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
觀看鎖定的電視頻道
2 設定所需的解码。
1 用數字按鈕或编排一览選擇被鎖
定的電視頻道所登錄的節目號
碼。
選擇數字:
按下 / 按鈕
移動遊標:
按下 / 按鈕。
屏幕變成藍色,並出現
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕。
(頻道鎖定)。
5
CH / CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
4 按下
道。
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
/
• 不能用
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
按鈕選擇鎖定的電視頻道。
2 按下DISPLAY按鈕,顯示“暗
码”(解码輸入屏幕)。
5
按鈕,選擇電視頻
• 電視機顯示所選的正在播放的電視頻道
的電視節目。
5 按下藍色按鈕,對此電視頻道設
定頻道鎖定功能。
出現
定。
/
(頻道鎖定),此電視頻道被鎖
取消頻道鎖定功能:
再次按下藍色按鈕。
(頻道鎖定)消失,解除鎖定。
:
3 按下數字按鈕,輸入解码。
鎖被暫時解開,可觀看此電視頻道。
如果忘記解码:
執行“設定頻道鎖定功能”的第一步。
確認了解碼後,按下TV/VIDEO按鈕,
退出菜單。
• 需取消頻道鎖定功能時,必須再次進行
“設定頻道鎖定功能”的操作。
6 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
菜單消失。
25
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 25
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:12 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■自動關機
可將電視機設定為當廣播結束後15分鐘以上
收不到信號時將其關閉。
开:
自動關機功能工作。
关:
自動關機功能不工作。
• 自動關機功能並不關閉電視機的主電
源。
• 自動關機功能對視頻模式不起作用。
■視頻-3設定
請根據VIDEO-3端子連接的外接裝置的視頻
信號輸入正確設定視頻-3設定。如果設定不
正確,則不能顯示圖像。
视频:
若輸入普通視頻信號(複合視頻信號)。
构成:
若輸入構成視頻信號(Y/CB/CR信號)。
• 有關詳細的連接方法,請參閱第33頁上
的“附加準備”。
• 僅當輸入構成視頻信號時,本機才與
Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)相
容。
26
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 26
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
導入菜單
CH
10
20%
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
OK
:
DISP.
:
• 按下DISPLAY按鈕,取消自動程序功
能。
2 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼一覽
內後,將出現编缉菜單。
■語言
可從菜單的語言一覽表中選擇用於在屏幕上
顯示的語言。
CH/CC
1 選擇语言,然後按下MENU/OK
按鈕。
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
OK
TV
DISP.
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
2 按下 / 按鈕,選擇一種語
言。
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
菜單消失。
■自動程序
• 可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一
覽。詳細說明,請參閱第28頁上的“編
輯/手動”。
• 如果想觀看的電視頻道未被設定在節目
號碼一覽內,請利用手動功能將其登
錄。
詳細說明請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手
動”。
• 自動程序功能不將電視頻道登錄在節目
號碼編俳 0(AV)內。
可按下列步驟,將在居住區域接收效果良好
的電視頻道自動登錄在電視節目號碼內。
• 如果不需使用編輯/手動功能,請按下
MENU/OK按鈕,退出編輯菜單。
1 選擇自动程序,然後按下MENU/
OK按鈕。
啟動自動程序功能。接收的電視頻道自
動登錄於節目號碼一覽內。
27
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 27
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
■編輯/手動
插入:
編輯/手動功能可分為兩種類型:
當前節目號碼的編輯(編輯功能)和將想要
觀看的電視頻道手動登錄到節目號碼內(手
動功能)。
注意
此功能利用CH/CC號碼,將新的電視頻道加
入當前節目號碼一覽內。
删除:
此功能刪除不需要的電視頻道。
手动:
• 使用移動、刪除或插入功能將重寫當前
的節目號碼一覽。
因此,將改變某些電視頻道的節目號
碼。
• 將手動功能用於設有頻道鎖定功能的電
視頻道將取消對電視頻道的頻道鎖定。
• 當有電視頻道已被登錄在編俳 99中時,
利用插入功能將刪除此電視頻道。
1 選擇编缉/手动,然後按下
MENU/OK按鈕。
CH/CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
此功能將新的電視頻道手動登錄在節目號碼
內。
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
• 對於節目號碼編俳 0,“AV”將出現在
節目號碼一覽中。
功能
移動
1 按下
道。
2 按下
/
按鈕,選擇電視頻
按鈕,啟動移动功能。
CH/CC
OK
TV
DISP.
2 按照需利用的功能的操作說明操
作功能。
移动:
此功能改變電視頻道的節目號碼。
解码:
此功能為電視頻道登錄頻道名(解碼)。
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
CC
01
02
03
OK
TV
DISP.
3 按下 /
號碼。
按鈕,選擇新的節目
取消移动功能:
按下DISPLAY按鈕。
4 按下 按鈕,將電視頻道的節目
號碼改變為新的節目號碼。
28
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 28
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
解碼
1 按下 / 按鈕,選擇電視頻
道。
2 按下紅色按鈕,啟動解码功能。
3 輸入頻道名(解码)。
按下 / 按鈕,選擇字符。
按下 / 按鈕,移動遊標。
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
M
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
01(B/G)
02
03
OK
TV
+
FINE+
DISP.
-
FINE-
取消手动功能:
按下DISPLAY按鈕。
CH/CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH/CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
3 按下 按鈕,選擇想登錄的電視
頻道的制式(聲音制式)。
• 有關各國或各地區的聲音制式,請參閱
第12頁上的“廣播制式”表。
OK
TV
DISP.
4 按下綠色或紅色按鈕,尋找電視
頻道。
取消解码功能:
按下DISPLAY按鈕。
4 按下MENU/OK按鈕,為電視頻
道登錄頻道名。
刪除
1 按下 / 按鈕,選擇電視頻
道。
2 按下黃色按鈕,刪除電視頻道。
從節目號碼一覽中刪除此電視頻道。
手動
1 按下 / 按鈕,選擇想登錄的
新電視頻道的節目號碼。
2 按下藍色按鈕,啟動手动功能。
當電視機找到電視頻道時停下搜索,並
顯示電視頻道。
5 反復按下綠色或紅色按鈕,直至
出現所需的電視頻道。
若電視頻道接收不佳:
按下藍色或黃色按鈕,微調電視頻道。
如果能正常顯示電視頻道的畫面,卻不
能正常收聽聲音:
系統的設定不正確。按下 按鈕,選擇
發出正常聲音的系統。
6 按下MENU/OK按鈕,將電視頻
道登錄於節目號碼。
回到編輯菜單。
在CH/CC號碼的右側,出現電視頻道的
系統(聲音制式)。
29
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 29
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
插入
準備
• 請從第31頁上找到電視頻道的頻道號碼
所對應的CH/CC號碼。
1 按下 / 按鈕,選擇想登錄的
新電視頻道的節目號碼。
2 按下綠色按鈕,啟動插入功能。
CH/CC
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
21
22
23
24
25
26
**
02
03
`-9
TV
CH/CC DISP.
3 按下 / 按鈕,根據電視頻道
的CH/CC號碼選擇“CC”或
“CH”。
取消插入功能:
按下DISPLAY按鈕。
4 按下數字按鈕,輸入CH/CC號
碼。
電視機轉換為登錄模式。
登錄結束時,此電視頻道的畫面會出現
在屏幕上。
• CH/CC號碼是表示電視的廣播頻率的號
碼。如果電視機檢測不到CH/CC號碼的
廣播頻率所對應的電視頻道,則顯示無
信號狀態的畫面。
30
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 30
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
CH/CC 號碼
需利用第30頁上的插入功能時,請從下表找出對應於電視頻道的頻道號碼的CH/CC號碼。
US:美國頻道號碼是用於美國和菲律賓等國的頻道號碼。
CCIR:CCIR頻道號碼是用於中東和東南亞等地區的頻道號碼。
OIRT:OIRT頻道號碼是用於東歐、俄羅斯和越南等國的頻道號碼。
CHINA:中國頻道號碼。用於中國等國的頻道號碼。
AUSTRALIA:澳大利亞頻道號碼是用於澳大利亞等國的頻道號碼。
頻道
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
頻道
US
CCIR
OIRT
CHINA
AUSTRALIA
CH
US-2
US-3
US-4
US-5
US-6
US-7
US-8
US-9
US-10
US-11
US-12
US-13
US-14
US-15
US-16
US-17
US-18
US-19
US-20
US-21
US-22
US-23
US-24
US-25
US-26
US-27
US-28
US-29
US-30
US-31
US-32
US-33
US-34
US-35
US-36
US-37
US-38
US-39
US-40
US-41
US-42
US-43
US-44
US-45
US-46
US-47
US-48
US-49
US-50
US-51
US-52
US-53
US-54
US-55
US-56
US-57
US-58
US-59
US-60
US-61
US-62
US-63
US-64
US-65
US-66
US-67
US-68
US-69
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
R1
DS-1
DS-2
DS-3
DS-7
DS-8
DS-9
AU-0
AU-1
AU-2
AU-6
AU-7
AU-8
AU-9
CC 01
CC 02
S-1
S-2
CC 03
CC 04
CC 05
CC 06
CC 07
CC 08
CC 09
CC 10
CC 11
CC 12
CC 13
CC 14
CC 15
CC 16
CC 17
CC 18
CC 19
CC 20
CC 21
CC 22
CC 23
CC 24
CC 25
CC 26
CC 27
CC 28
CC 29
CC 30
CC 31
CC 32
CC 33
CC 34
CC 35
CC 36
CC 37
CC 38
CC 39
CC 40
CC 41
CC 42
CC 43
CC 44
CC 45
CC 46
CC 47
CC 48
CC 49
CC 50
CC 51
CC 52
CC 53
CC 54
CC 55
CC 56
CC 57
CC 58
CC 59
CC 60
CC 61
CC 62
CC 63
CC 64
CC 75
CC 76
CC 77
CC 78
CC 79
CC 95
CC 96
CC 97
CC 98
CC 99
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-20
S-21
S-22
S-23
S-24
S-25
S-26
S-27
S-28
S-29
S-30
S-31
S-32
S-33
S-34
S-35
S-36
S-37
S-38
S-39
S-40
S-41
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
E67
E68
E69
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
R2
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
DS-10
DS-11
DS-12
Z-8
DS-13
DS-14
DS-15
DS-16
DS-17
DS-18
DS-19
DS-20
DS-21
DS-22
DS-23
DS-24
DS-25
DS-26
DS-27
DS-28
DS-29
DS-30
DS-31
DS-32
DS-33
DS-34
DS-35
DS-36
DS-37
DS-38
DS-39
DS-40
DS-41
DS-42
DS-43
DS-44
DS-45
DS-46
DS-47
DS-48
DS-49
DS-50
DS-51
DS-52
DS-53
DS-54
DS-55
DS-56
DS-57
Page 31
ブラック
AU-10
AU-11
US
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1
W+2
W+3
W+4
W+5
W+6
W+7
W+8
W+9
W+10
W+11
W+12
W+13
W+14
W+15
W+16
W+17
W+18
W+19
W+20
W+21
W+22
W+23
W+24
W+25
W+26
W+27
W+28
CCIR
X
Y
Z
Z+1
Z+2
OIRT
CHINA
AUSTRALIA
AU-5
Z-1
Z-2
Z-3
Z-4
AU-5A
Z-5
Z-6
Z-7
DS-6
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Z-13
Z-14
Z-15
Z-16
Z-17
Z-18
Z-19
Z-20
Z-21
Z-22
Z-23
Z-24
Z-25
Z-26
Z-27
Z-28
Z-29
Z-30
Z-31
Z-32
Z-33
Z-34
Z-35
Z-36
Z-37
R3
R4
R5
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
DS-4
DS-5
AU-3
AU-4
31
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
使用電視機菜單
演示菜單
OK
:
TV
:
DISP.
:
演示功能自動演示一些電視功能。
演示功能設定於開時:
每當打開電視機時,自動開始演示。
若不需演示,請將演示功能設為關。
1 按下
/
按鈕,選擇开。
選擇閉,則取消演示功能。
2 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設
定。
將演示功能設定為開,開始演示。
停止演示:
按下遙控器上的任一按鈕。
32
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 32
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
附加準備
■連接外接裝置
將裝置連接於本電視機時,請參閱連接圖。
連接前:
• 請參閱裝置所附的說明書。有的裝置的
連接方法與連接圖可能有所不同。另
外,為了保證正常工作,可能需根據連
接方法改變裝置的設定。
• 關閉包括電視機在內的所有裝置。
• 第40頁上的“技術規格”內有視頻端子
的詳細說明。如果所需連接的裝置不在
下列連接圖中,請參閱“技術規格”,
選擇最合適的視頻端子。
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
R
IN (VIDEO-4)
• 未附帶連接電纜。
• 連接AV COMPU LINK支持的裝置時,
請參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV
COMPU LINK的裝置”。
1 VCR(複合信號)
2 VCR(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信號,Y/
C)
3 用於錄製的VCR(複合信號)
4 DVD放像機(複合信號)
5 DVD放像機(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)
信號,Y/C)
AUDIO
R
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
6 DVD放像機(構成視頻信號,Y/CB/CR)
7 電視遊戲(複合信號)
8 電視遊戲(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信
號,Y/C)
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
9 Camcorder(複合信號)
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
0 Camcorder(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信
號,Y/C)
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
- 耳機
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
A AV COMPU LINK電纜
33
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 33
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
附加準備
連接方法
1 用視頻電纜將電視機的VIDEO插
口和裝置的VIDEO OUT插口連接
起來。
如果用S-VIDEO電纜將裝置連接於
電視機:
用S-VIDEO電纜來代替視頻電纜,將VCR的
S-VIDEO OUT接口和電視機的“S”(SVIDEO)接口連接起來。
同時用視頻電纜和S-VIDEO電纜將VCR與電
視機連接時,用視頻電纜進行的連接將無
效。
如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機
連接於電視機:
用構成視頻電纜來代替視頻電纜,將VIDEO3端子的三個插口(Y/VIDEO、CB和CR)和
DVD放像機的COMPONENT(構成視頻輸
出)插口連接起來。然後按照第26頁上的
“視頻-3設定”將視頻-3設定設定為構成。
• (當輸入構成視頻信號時,)本機與
Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)相
容。
如果DVD放像機作為構成視頻信號輸出
Progressive視頻信號(525P),則當將
該裝置用構成視頻電纜連接在電視機上
時,可不失真地觀看錄製在DVD碟片上
的圖像。
如果用視頻電纜將裝置連接於
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT(視頻3/ 構成)端子:
用視頻電纜將電視機的Y/VIDEO插口和裝置
的VIDEO OUT插口連接起來。
然後按照第26頁上的“視頻-3設定”將視頻-3
設定設定為視頻。
2 用音頻電纜將電視機的AUDIO插
口(L/MONO和R)和裝置的
AUDIO OUT(音頻L/R輸出)插
口連接起來。
如果裝置的聲音輸出為單聲道:
用音頻電纜將裝置的AUDEO OUT插口和電
視機的L/MONO插口連接起來。
將裝置連接於OUTPUT端子
透過OUTPUT端子輸出現在正用電視機觀看
的畫面和聲音的信號。透過將VCR連接於
OUTPUT端子,可將現正播放的圖像和聲音
錄制在VCR上。此時,請按照下列步驟,將
VCR和OUTPUT端子連接起來。
1 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的
VIDEO插口和VCR的VIDEO IN
(視頻輸入)插口連接起來。
2 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的
AUDIO插口(L和R)和VCR的
AUDIO IN(音頻L/R輸入)插口
連接起來。
• 關閉電視機時,來自OUTPUT端子的信
號也將消失。
• 來自VIDEO-3/COMPONENT端子的構
成信號輸入不能透過OUTPUT端子輸
出。
連接耳機
用立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)將耳機與
電視機前面板上的耳機插口連接起來。
• 在VIDEO-4端子,VIDEO插口標示為
“V”。
34
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 34
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
附加準備
■連接支持AV COMPU
LINK 的裝置
利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系
統的條件
利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系統,可在操作
一個裝置時,自動控制相關裝置。
如將此系統應用於本電視機,可在操作一個
外接裝置時,自動進行電視機的所需操作,
而無需用電視機的遙控器打開電視機或改變
視頻模式。
• 需帶有AV COMPU LINK端子的裝置。
AV COMPU LINK遙控系統
的操作例
僅需按下VCR或DVD放像機上的PLAY按鈕,
可觀看來自這些裝置的圖像。
僅需將預先錄製的錄像帶(去除錄製保護片
的磁帶)插入VCR,可觀看錄像帶。
僅需操作AV控制接收器,可正確打開或關閉
(待機模式)電視機或改變視頻模式。
• 須用AV COMPU LINK電纜連接電視機
和裝置。本電視機不附帶AV COMPU
LINK電纜。如沒有AV COMPU LINK電
纜,請用兩端帶有直徑為3.5mm(單
聲)的插入式插頭的電纜連接。
• 須將裝置連接於正確的VIDEO端子,並
正確安裝。否則AV COMPU LINK遙控
系統不能正確發揮作用。詳細說明,請
參閱“安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系
統”。
• 電視機須為待機模式(POWER指示燈亮
紅燈)。如果電視機的主電源處於關閉
狀態(POWER指示燈熄滅),AV
COMPU LINK遙控系統將不起作用。
• AV COMPU LINK遙控系統的性能因所
連接的裝置而定。請參閱裝置的使用說
明書。
安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系
統
• 當選擇“電視聲音”作為AV控制接收器
的輸入音源時,有時電視機的靜音功能
會自動啟動,機內揚聲器不發出聲音。
此時,請按下電視機遙控器上的
VOLUME m 按鈕或MUTING按鈕,取
消靜音功能。可重新從機內揚聲器收聽
聲音。
注意:
• 有些裝置的安裝方法不同於此處說明的
方法。安裝前,請務必通讀該裝置的使
用說明書。
1 將裝置連接於電視機的VIDEO-1
或VIDEO-2端子。
如用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機和
電視機連接起來:
將DVD放像機和電視機的VIDEO-3端子連接
起來。
• 有關連接方法的詳細說明,請參閱第33
頁上的“連接外接裝置”。
35
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 35
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
附加準備
2 用AV COMPU LINK電纜將電視
機的AV COMPU LINK端子和裝
置的AV COMPU LINK端子連接
起來。
3 根據所連接的VIDEO端子改變裝
置的設定。
如果VCR連接於VIDEO-1端子:
將VCR的遙控碼設為A碼。
如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-1端
子:
將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設
為DVD2。
如果VCR連接於VIDEO-2端子:
將VCR的遙控碼設為B碼。
如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-2端
子:
將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設
為DVD3。
如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機
與VIDEO-3端子相連接:
將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設
為DVD1。
• 有關改變裝置的設定的詳細說明,請參
閱該裝置的使用說明書。
• 如果所連接的裝置既無遙控碼,也無AV
COMPULINK MODE時,請將其連接於
電視機的VIDEO-1端子。
36
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 36
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
故障排除
如果使用本電視機時發生問題,請在提出修理前仔細閱讀此“故障排除”。可能會很方便地自
己解決問題。例如,如果交流電源插頭未插入交流電源插座或電視機天線有問題,而您卻可能
懷疑是電視機的問題。
重要:
• 此故障排除指南僅包括難於確定原因的問題。如果在操作某一功能時發生問題,請參閱說
明該功能的操作之頁,而不是此故障排除指南。
• 在按照此故障排除的說明或有關功能的操作說明操作後仍無進展,請將交流電源插頭從交
流電源插座上拔下,讓人修理電視機。請勿自行修理電視機或拆下後蓋。
■如果不能打開電視機
• 交流電源插頭是否插入交流電源插座?
• POWER指示燈是否亮燈?如未亮燈,請
按下主電源按鈕。
■無畫面或無聲音
• 是否所選擇的電視頻道的接收效果特
差?若如此,會啟動藍背景功能,整個
屏幕會變成藍色,聲音變為靜音。如需
觀看此電視頻道,請按照第24頁上的
“藍背景”的說明,將藍背景功能設定
為關。
• 電視頻道的聲音制式的設定值是否正
確?
請按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM
(聲音制式)按鈕”解決問題。
■畫面不清楚
• 如果整個畫面不清楚(雪花圖像),則
天線或天線電纜可能有問題。請進行下
列檢查,解決問題:
電視機和天線是否正確連接?
天線電纜是否損壞?
天線是否指向正確方向?
天線是否損壞?
• 如果電視機或天線的接收受到其他裝置
的干擾,在畫面上可能會出現條狀或噪
音。將擴音器、個人電腦或吹風器等會
干擾電視機的裝置從電視機旁移開,或
改變位置。如果天線受到無線電發射塔
或高壓線的影響,請向當地的供銷商恰
詢。
• 如果電視機受到來自大山或大樓的信號
反射的干擾,會出現雙重圖像(重
影)。
請改變天線的方向或將其換成具有更佳
方向性的天線。
• 電視頻道的彩色制式的設定值是否正
確?請按照第11頁上的“COLOUR
SYSTEM(彩色制式)按鈕”解決問
題。
• 是否正確調節色彩或亮度?請按照第18
頁上的“畫面調節”正確調節。
37
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 37
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
故障排除
• 當在屏幕上顯示白亮的靜止圖像(例如
白色服裝),白色部分可能會看上去像
是彩色的。這是因顯像管的特性而引起
的不可避免的現象,而不是電視機的故
障。
當圖像從屏幕上消失後,這一不自然的
色彩也會跟著消失。
• 觀看市售的未正確錄製的視頻軟體或錄
像帶時,圖像頂部可能會變形。
這是因視頻信號而引起的,而不是故
障。
• 接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)
時,下列功能無效;
遙控器功能:
ZOOM、PIP、MULTI、FREEZE和
STROBE按鈕
菜單功能:
銳度、色彩微調、數字VNR、Digipure
和鏡頭。
■聲音不清楚
• 是否正確調節低音或高音?若未正確調
節,請按照第22頁上的“聲音調節”正
確調節。
• 電視頻道接收不佳時,可能較難收聽立
體聲或雙重語言聲音。此時,請按照第
22頁上的“立體聲/Ⅰ•Ⅱ”的說明,將
其改為單聲道,以更清晰地收聽。
■不能操作
• 遙控器的電池是否耗盡?
請按照第4頁上的“將電池裝入遙控器”
的說明,換上新電池,解決問題。
• 是否在電視機的側面或後面或者在離電
視機7米以上之處使用遙控器?請在電視
機的前面或在離電視機7米以內使用遙控
器。
• 是否將童鎖功能設定為開?如果將童鎖
功能設定為開,則不能用電視機的前面
控制按鈕操作電視機。請按照第24頁上
的“童鎖”的說明,將童鎖功能設定為
關。
• 如果突然不能操作電視機,請按下電視
機的主電源按鈕,關閉主電源。再次按
下主電源按鈕,打開主電源。如果電視
機恢復正常狀態,則未出故障。
38
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 38
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
故障排除
■其他說明
• 當睡眠鐘功能或自動關機功能工作時,
電視機將自動關閉。
如果電視機突然關閉,請按下POWER按
鈕,再次打開電視機。如果此時電視機
工作正常,則無問題。
• 使用耳機時,如果不想從機內揚聲器發
出聲音,請將耳機菜單中的機內揚聲器
設定改為關。詳細說明,請參閱第23頁
上的“耳機”
• 如將揚聲器之類的磁性裝置放在電視機
的附近,在屏幕的邊角上畫面可能會重
疊或色彩不自然。此時,請將該裝置遠
離電視機。如果因揚聲器產生這一現
象,請使用磁屏蔽揚聲器。
• 畫面可能因地球磁性的影響而歪斜。此
時,請按照第21頁上的“畫面糾正”,
糾正歪斜。
• 進行頻道等操作時,需稍等片刻方能出
現圖像。這不是故障。這是因為需待圖
像穩定後方能顯示。
• 因溫度的突然變換,電視機可能會發出
劈啪的響聲。如果圖像和聲音正常,則
無問題。如果觀看電視時,經常聽見劈
啪的響聲,則可能是由其他原因造成
的。
為了小心起見,請讓技術服務人員檢查
一下。
• 觸摸屏幕表面時,可能會感到由靜電引
起的輕微的觸電。
這是由顯像管的結構引起的不可避免的
現象,而不是電視機的問題。
請休息一會,該靜電放電不會對人體造
成有害影響。
39
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 39
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
技術規格
廣播制式
彩色制式
頻道和頻率
多聲道制式
電源要求
音頻輸出
VIDEO-1(視頻-1)端子
VIDEO-2(視頻-2)端子
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
(視頻-3/構成)端子
VIDEO-4(視頻-4)端子
OUTPUT(輸出)端子
耳機插口
附件
揚聲器
消耗功率
屏幕尺寸
(對角測量)
尺寸(寬×高×長)
重量
B、G、I、D、K、K1、M
PAL、SECAM、NTSC3.58/4.43MHz
VHF低頻道(VL)=46.25至168.25 MHz
VHF高頻道(VH)=175.25至463.25 MHz
UHF頻道(U)=471.25至863.25 MHz
■ 可接收中頻段(X至Z+2、S1至S10)、高頻段
(S11至S20)和超高頻段(S21至S41)的有線頻道。
A2(B/G)、NICAM(B/G、I、D/K)制式
交流110至240V,50/60 Hz
額定功率輸出:20W+20W
RCA接口×3、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)接口×1
•備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)(Y/C)輸入和音頻
L/R輸入。
RCA接口×3
•備有視頻輸入和音頻L/R輸入。
RCA接口×5
•備有視頻輸入/構成視頻(Y/CB/CR)輸入和音頻L/R輸入
•備有Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)輸入。
RCA接口×3、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)接口×1
•備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)(Y/C)輸入和音頻
L/R輸入。
RCA接口×3
•備有視頻輸出和音頻L/R輸出。
立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)
遙控器×1(RM-C215)
AA/R6/5號乾電池×2
HV-34LPZ:12cm 圓形×2,3.5cm 圓形×2
HV-29LPZ:10cm 圓形×2,3.5cm 圓形×2
HV-34LPZ:最大255W,平均170W
HV-29LPZ:最大254W,平均170W
HV-34LPZ:顯像管87cm 可視範圍80cm
HV-29LPZ:顯像管73cm 可視範圍68cm
HV-34LPZ:898mm×728mm×579mm
HV-29LPZ:732mm×588mm×518mm
HV-34LPZ:75kg
HV-29LPZ:48kg
設計和規格如有變更,恕不另行通告。
因涉及到侵犯版權的問題,不得到原有圖像版權主的同意,利用本電視機的鏡頭功能顯示在屏
幕上的圖像不得用於在公共場所(餐館、賓館等)的商業或演示目的的顯示。
40
LCT1217-001A-H_C/p20-40
Page 40
ブラック
02.3.28, 5:13 PM
Adobe PageMaker 6.5J/PPC
COLOUR TELEVISION
HV-34LPZ
HV-29LPZ
Contents
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6
Remote control buttons
and functions . . . 8
Using the TV's menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INSTRUCTIONS
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
1
Black
LCT1218-001A-H
0402-Ki-NV-JMT
4/9/02, 6:51 PM
Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.
To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this
manual thoroughly before you begin.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.
1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.
2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,
grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.
3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.
Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.
When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more
than the minimum distances as shown.
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.
5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.
Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.
6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it
when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,
wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.
Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.
7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to
disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.
2
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
2
Black
4/9/02, 6:51 PM
Setting up your TV
CAUTION
• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV
before connecting anything.
1 Connecting the aerial and VCR
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Fig.A
• Read the manual that came with the VCR
before connecting.
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket
on this TV .
Back of the TV
AUDIO
R
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial
input socket on the VCR, and
connect the VCR and TV with
another aerial cable.
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack and the TV's
VIDEO jack with a video cable.
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO
cable:
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and TV's S connector with an SVIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a
video cable .
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
R AUDIO L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
Fig.B
Back of the TV
A
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
S
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with
an audio cable.
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
AV COMPULINK
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an
audio cable.
• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK
Supported Devices” on page 38.
3
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
3
Black
4/9/02, 6:51 PM
Setting up your TV
2 Connecting the power cord
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.
3 Putting the batteries into the
Remote control
Use two AA/R6 batteries.
Insert the batteries from the
end, making sure the
and
polaritiles are correct.
• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.
• If the remote control does not work properly,
replace the batteries.
• The batteries we supply are only for setting up
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon
as necessary.
4 Making the initial settings
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.
1 Press the main power button on the TV
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.
• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does
not change to green, your TV is in the standby
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote
control to turn the TV on.
• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has
already been turned before. In this case,use the
"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions
to make the initial settings. For details, see
"INSTALL menu" on page 29.
2 Press the MENU/OK button
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
POWER lamp
Main power button
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose
a language for the on-screen language.
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
4
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
4
Black
4/9/02, 6:51 PM
Setting up your TV
3 Press the / buttons to choose
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK
button.
PICTURE
MODE
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are automatically
stored in the programme numbers list.
AUTO PROGRAM
CH
POWER
TV/VIDEO
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20%
0
RETURN
OK
DISP
:OK
:BACK
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press
the DISPLAY button.
MUTING
4 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number (PR)
list, the EDIT menu appears.
EDIT
PIP
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
SUB-P
CH/CC
:BACK
NEXT
PIP
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in
the programme numbers list, you can register it
using the MANUAL function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
TEXT
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a
TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL
function, press the MENU/OK button to close the
EDIT menu.
Now, the setting up is complete.
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!
5
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
5
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
TV buttons and functions
Turn the main power on
Press the main power button 1 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is
in the standby mode.
To turn the main power off :
press the main power button again.
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.
Turn the TV on from standby
mode
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and
your TV will be turned on.
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby
mode.
82
1
7
9
Choose a TV channel
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Choose a VIDEO terminal
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .
Adjust the volume
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .
The volume level indicater appears.
MENU button 6
(Behind the cover)
Press to open the menu.
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on
the TV" on page 19.
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
IN (VIDEO-4)
0
-
R
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
65 43
Remote control sensor
and ECO sensor 9
ECO lamp 7
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.
6
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
6
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
TV buttons and functions
SPATIALIZER lamp 8
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.
Headphone jack 0
AUDIO
R
Connect the headphones with a stereo
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).
When using the headphones, follow the
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 25.
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CB
CR
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
VIDEO-1 terminal =
• See page 3 and 36.
AUDIO
S
L/MONO VIDEO
R
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
L/MONO
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
!
• See page 36.
OUTPUT
@
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal !
• See page 28 and 36.
VIDEO
VIDEO-4 terminal -
AV COMPU LINK
$
VIDEO-2 terminal ~
Y/VIDEO
AUDIO
R
=
~
• See page 36.
#
OUTPUT terminal @
• See page 36.
Aerial socket #
Connect the aerial cable.
• See page 3.
AV COMPU LINK terminal $
• See page 36 and 38.
7
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
7
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Turn the TV on from standby mode
Press the POWER button.
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be
turned on.
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+
buttons or the number buttons.
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To turn the TV off:
Press the POWER button again.
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV
enters standby mode.
0
RETURN
Choose a TV channel
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has
been set.
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the
programme number (PR) with the number
buttons.
• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry
system.
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.
• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR
SYSTEM button" on page 11.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the
picture appears normally, follow the operation
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
Adjust the volume
TEXT
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.
• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on
page 25.
8
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
8
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Watch images from external
devices
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external
device has been connected.
16:9
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 aspect ratio).
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.
To return to a TV channel:
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+
buttons or the number buttons.
MUTING button
• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect
ratio that have been squeezed into a
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you
can restore their original demensions.
Press the MUTING button to turn off
the volume. Pressing the MUTING
button again resumes the previous
volume level.
SPATIALIZER button
ZOOM button
Press the SPATIALIZER button to
choose a mode.
You can change the screen size according to the
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one
from the following ZOOM modes.
Press the ZOOM button to choose a
mode.
• If you press the ZOOM button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen and
the ZOOM function does not operate.
You can enjoy Surround sound with a
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER
function.
LIVE :
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo
sound converting it into surround sound
with added depth and ambience.
MONO :
Mono allows you to enjoy normal
monaural sound by converting it into a
stereo-like sound.
REGULAR
OFF :
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as
its original size is.
This function is turned off.
• The LIVE mode works properly only
with stereo sound.
• The LIVE mode does not work
correctly with headphones.
ZOOM
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect
ratio) to fill the TV screen.
• The MONO mode works properly only
with monaural sound.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
• The left side and right side of the Wide
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.
9
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
9
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
BASS button
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)
function.
Press the BASS button to turn the
SUPER BASS function on or off.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
PICTURE MODE button
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to
adjust the picture settings automatically.
Press the PICTURE MODE button
choose a mode.
BRIGHT :
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD :
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT :
Softens contrast and sharpness.
RETURN+ button
The RETURN+ button has two functions;
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN
function. If a channel has been registerd as
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+
function operates. If there is no setting for
the "Return Channel", the RETURN
function operates.
RETURN+ function :
By registering a channel you frequently
view as the "Return Channel", you can
select that channel at any time simply by
pressing the RETURN+ button.
To register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
Choose the Programme number to which
the channel you want to register has been
set, and press the RETURN+ button and
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is
displayed and the registration is completed.
To cancel register a TV channel as the
"Return Channel" :
while viewing any TV channel, press the
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS
CANCELED!" is displayed and the registration is cancelled.
• When you turn off the TV, the
registration for the "Return Channel" is
cancelled.
• If you want to view the "Return Channel"
and another TV channel alternately, first
choose a channel other than the
"Return Channel". and then press the
RETURN+ button to change the
channel to the "Return Channel" In this
way, you can view two channels
alternately by pressing the RETURN+
button.
RETURN function :
The TV temporarily memorises the TV
channel that was choosen right before the
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can
alternately view the current TV channel and
the "Last Channel".
• If you want to view two channels
alternately by using the RETURN
function, first choose one TV channel
and then choose the other TV channel
with the Number buttons. If you choose
the TV channel without using the
Number buttons, there are cases where
a channel other than the one you first
chose is registered as the "Last
Channel".
10
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
10
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
/ button
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
Press the
/ button to
choose a sound mode.
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
DISPLAY button
You can display the PR LIST, programme
number or VIDEO terminal number on the
screen.
Press the DISPLAY button.
Press the DISPLAY button changes the
display as follows:
PR LIST
ID
1
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
-10
No indication
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
1 Press the DISPLAY button to
display the PR LIST.
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose a programme number
or VIDEO terminal.
Then press the MENU/OK
button.
• For programme numbers with the
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed
next to the programme number in the PR
LIST.
: Stereo sound
PR
Choose a TV channel or a
VIDEO terminal
• The VIDEO terminals are registered after
the programme number PR99.
COLOUR SYSTEM button
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button
to choose the appropriate colour
system.
AUTO :
This function detects a colour system from
the input signal.
• The AUTO mode may not function
properly if you have poor signal quality.
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO
mode, choose another colour system
manually.
• The AUTO mode detects a colour system
from the input signal and chooses the
appropiate colour system automatically.
• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15
for details.
+10
11
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
11
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
• For the colour systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
SOUND SYSTEM button
The sound system is chosen automatically. However, if you cannot hear the
sound normally even when the picture
appears normally, chooes the sound
system maunually.
Press the SOUND SYSTEM
button to choose the appropriate
sound system.
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS
For sound sysytem colour system in your country
or rigion, refer to the table below.
COLOUR SYSTEM
Area
Middle
China, Vietnam, etc
PAL
East
Hong Kong, etc
PAL
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
Europe
: I system
D/K : D/K system
M
Oceania
: M system
• This function does not work in the
VIDEO mode.
• For the sound systems in each
country or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on
page 12.
Africa
Area
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
NTSC
Russia, etc
SECAM
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
PAL
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
PAL
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
PAL
PAL
Republic of South Africa, etc
PAL
Nigeria, etc
PAL
Egypt, Morocco, etc
SECAM
Country or Region
B/G
China, Vietnam, etc
D/K
Hong Kong, etc
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,
Saudi Arabia, etc.
B/G
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc
M
Russia, etc
D/K
Europe
Czech Republic, Poland, etc
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc
D/K
B/G
Oceania
UK, etc
Australia, New Zealand, etc
Republic of South Africa, etc
I
B/G
Africa
Nigeria, etc
B/G
Egypt, Morocco, etc
B/G
East
12
12
System
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
Middle
Black
SECAM
SOUND SYSTEM
Asia,
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
System
Asia,
B/G : B/G system
I
Country or Region
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.
PAL
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,
Thailand, India, etc.
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
I
Remote control buttons and functions
FREEZE button
You can view the Main picture's forzen image
as the SUB-picture.
Press the FREEZE button.
Still pictures
MAIN
To cancel the FREEZE function :
Press the FREEZE button again.
• If you press the STROBE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the STROBE function does
not operate.
• You cannot change the TINT setting for
the still images on the screen even if
you are viewing a programme with
NTSC colour system.
Using the MULTI
function
• You cannot use the FREEZE button when
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are
displayed on the screen.
You can display multi-pictures that enable
you to easily find a program you want to
view.
• If you press the FREEZE button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the FREEZE function does
not operate.
1 Press the MULTI button.
Press the MULTI button changes the
display as follow:
5-pictures multi mode
STROBE button
1
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15
consecutive still images.
2
1
3
MAIN
Still
pictures
4
Press the STROBE button.
5
Moving
picture
16-pictures multi mode
Moving
picture
To cancel the STROBE function:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
12
5
16
Press the STROBE button to return to the
MAIN-picture.
• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is
weak, the still images become abnormal.
• You cannot use the STROBE button
when the SUB-picture or the MAINpicture are displayed on the screen.
Still
pictures
Moving
picture
Cancel the MULTI function
To display next Multi pictures :
Press the NEXT button.
13
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
13
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
2 Choose the desired picture with
the / and / buttons, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
The screen switches to the TV channel or
VIDEO mode of your choice.
• Any programme numbers to which no TV
channel has been registered, or
programme numbers to which
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not
displayed.
• You cannot perform menu operations
such as headphone volume adjustment.
Cancel the MULTI function once to
perform menu operations.
• If you press the MULTI button when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal), “525P” appears on the
screen and the MULTI function does not
operate.
Using the PIP function
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at
the same time.
Press the PIP button.
Press the PIP button changes the display as
follows:
Twin pictures mode
2
5
SUB
MAIN
Picture in picture mode
2
SUB
5
MAIN
• During the short period that is required
for the Multi-pictures display to close no
sound comes from the television.
Cancel the PIP function
• You cannot view a picture from the same
programme number (or the same VIDEO
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and
the SUB-picture at the same time.
• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the
quality of the SUB-picture may also be
poor.
• If the picture standards of both pictures
are different, the top and bottom or one of
them may be missing.
• The ZOOM function does not operate
when viewing pictures using the PIP
function.
• The SUB-picture cannot be output from
TV.
• If you press the PIP button when receiving
the Progressive Video Signal (525P
signal), “525P” appears on the screen
and the PIP function does not operate.
14
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
14
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Choose a TV channel for
the SUB-picture
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.
Listen to the sound of SUBpicture
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on
your headphones while listening to the sound
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.
Change the colour system
of the SUB-picture
• You cannot change the COLOUR
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the
COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote
control.
POSITION button
You can adjust the position of the SUBPicture when using the Picture in picture
mode.
Press the POSITION button
repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, the SUBPicture moves counterclockwise.
1 While the SUB-picture is displayed, press the MENU/OK
button to display the MENU
(main manu).
2 Press the / and / buttons
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,
and then press the MENU/OK
button.
3 Press the / buttons to
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
SWAP button
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the
SUB-picture with each other.
Press the SWAP button.
COLOUR SYSTEM
MAIN
SUB
NTSC 3.58
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
4 Press the / buttons to
choose SUB, and then press the
/ buttons to choose the
appropriate colour system. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
• Do not press the SWAP button while you
are recording the TV output on the VCR.
If you do, the output signal will change.
15
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
15
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
Viewing a teletext
programme
1 Choose a TV channel with a
teletext broadcast.
2 Press the TV/TEXT button.
Press the TV/TEXT button changes the
mode as follows:
HOLD button
You can hold a teletext page on the screen
for as long as you want, even while several
other teletext pages are being received.
Press the HOLD button.
The
(hold) are displayed at the top left
of the screen.
To cancel the Hold function:
Press the HOLD button again.
REVEAL button
TV mode
TV and
Text mode
Some teletext pages include hidden text
(such as answers to a quiz).
You can display the hidden text.
Each time you press the REVEAL
button, text is hidden or revealed.
Text mode
3 Choose a teletext page by
pressing the CHANNEL-/+
buttons, number buttons or
coloured buttons.
To return to the TV mode:
Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO
button.
• If you have trouble receiving tetetext
broadcasts, consult your local dealer or
the broadcast station.
• In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is
fixed to the REGULAR mode.
• No menu operations are possible when
viewing a teletext programme.
• If characters on a teletext programme do
not appear properly, change the
TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For
details, see “TELETEXT LANGUAGE” on
page 34.
SIZE button
You can double the height of teletext
display.
Press the SIZE button.
INDEX button
You can return to the index page instantly.
Press the INDEX button.
• In the List mode, you can return to the
page number displayed in the lower left
area of the screen.
CANCEL button
You can serch for a teletext page while
watching TV.
1 Press the number button to
enter a page number, or press
the coloured button.
The TV searches for a teletext page.
16
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
16
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Remote control buttons and functions
2 Press the CANCEL button.
The TV programme appears. When the
TV finds the teletext page, its page
number appears in the upper left of the
screen.
3 Press the CANCEL button to
return to a teletext page when
the page number is on the
screen.
• You cannot return to the TV mode with
the CANCEL button.
SUBPAGE button
Some teletext pages include sub-pages that
are automatically displayed. You can hold
any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.
1 Press the SUBPAGE button to
operate the Sub-page function.
Sub-page numbers are displayed at the
left of the screen.
Colour*
Yellow
White
Blue or Red
Meaning of sub-page number
Currently being displayed.
Can be displayed.
Cannot be displayed and
it is not sent.
* : Background color of the sub-page
number.
2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons
to choose a sub-page number.
Using the List mode
You can store the numbers of your favourite
teletext pages in memory and call them up
quickly using the coloured buttons.
To store the page numbers :
1 Press the MODE button to
engage the List mode.
The stored page numbers are displayed
at the buttom of the screen.
2 Press a coloured button to
choose a position. Then press
the number buttons to enter the
page number.
3 Press and hold down the
STORE button.
The four page numbers blink white to
indicate that they are stored in memory.
To call up a stored page :
1 Press the MODE button to
engage the List mode.
2 Press a coloured button to
which a page has been assigned.
To exit the List mode :
Press the MODE button again.
To cancel the Sub-page function:
Press the SUBPAGE button again.
17
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
17
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating
techniques fully.
Basic operation
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display
the MENU (main menu).
MENU
PICTURE SETTING
INSTALL
PICTURE FEATURES
DEMO
SOUND SETTING
9
FEATURES
0
RETURN
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu
indicates buttons on the remote control you
can use when you operate a chosen function.
MENU/OK button
TV
TV/VIDEO button
DISP.
DISPLAY button
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
OK
SWAP
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
2 Press the / and / buttons to
choose a menu title, and press the
MENU/OK button.
The menu appears.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
To return to the previous menu:
Press the DISPLAY button.
To exit a menu instantly:
Press the TV/VIDEO button.
TEXT
3 Press the
function.
/
buttons to choose a
• For details of the functions in the menus, see
the following pages.
18
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
18
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
4 Press the / buttons to
choose the setting of that function.
• If you want to operate a function which
appears only with its name, follow the
descriptions of that function on the
following pages.
5 Press the MENU/OK button to
comple the setting.
The menu disappears.
• When watching the television with the
NTSC system, the menus are displayed
at about half of their normal verical size.
Operation with the
buttons on the TV
You can also operate the menus using the
buttons on the front panel of the TV.
OK
button
/
buttons
/
buttons
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
button
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
• There is no button on the front panel of
the TV that has the function of the
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.
19
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
19
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE SETTING menu
PICTURE SETTING
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
SHARP
COLOUR
TINT
WHITE BALANCE
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
STANDARD
MID
ON
RESET
SHARP
You can adjust the picture sharpness.
: softer
: sharper
• You cannot select the SHARP function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
COLOUR
PICTURE MODE
You can choose one of three PICTURE
MODEs to adjust the picture settings
automatically.
BRIGHT:
Heightens contrast and sharpness.
STANDARD:
Standardizes picture adjustment.
SOFT:
Softens contrast and sharpness.
• You can also operate the PICTURE
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE
button on the remote control.
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"
on page 10.
Adjusting the picture
You can change the picture settings of each
picture mode as you like. The picture settings
changed are stored in the picture mode.
CONTRAST
You can adjust the picture contrast.
: lower
: higer
BRIGHT
You can adjust the picture brighetness.
: darker
: brighter
You can adjust the picture colour.
: lighter
: deeper
TINT
You can adjust the picture tint.
: reddish
: greenish
• You can change the TINT setting (picture
tint) only when the colour system is
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.
• You cannot select the TINT function when
receiving the Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal).
To return to the default settings
in each PICTURE MODE :
Press the blue button. Returns the picture
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE
MODE mode to the default settings, and
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.
WHITE BALANCE
You can select one of three WHITE
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since
white is the colour which is used as a
refernce for all the other colours, changing
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the
appearance of all the other colours on the
screen.
COOL:
A bluish white. Using this mode when
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy
a more vivid and bright picture.
20
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
20
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
PICTURE FEATURES menu
MID:
The normal white colour.
PICTURE FEATURES
WARM:
A raddish white. Using this mode when
watching films allows you to enjoy colours
that are characteristic of films.
• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE
function in the Twin pictures mode or the
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR
function to ON, the screen contrast is automatically adjusted to a setting suitable for the
brightness of your room. This reduces eye
strain for you and the power consumption of
the TV.
DIGITAL VNR
DigiPure
PULL DOWN
COLOUR SYSTEM
ZOOM
PICTIRE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
DIGITAL VNR
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the
amount of noise in the original picture.
• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR
function when receiving the Progressive
Video Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will be automatically adjust the level
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the
best possible picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
DISPLAY :
This function is turned on. Further, clover
marks indicating the brightness of your
room are displayed for several seconds each
time the brightness changes. The number of
clover marks displayed on the screen
increases as your room becomes darker.
• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too
high it can make the picture less sharp.
It is recommended to use the AUTO
setting if you can.
MAX:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
MIN:
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness
of the original picture has not been
reproduced fully, change the setting from
AUTO to MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
21
LCT1218-001A-H_p1-21
21
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
DigiPure
MIN:
The Digipure function uses the latest in
digital technology to give you a natural
looking picture. The Digipure function
includes the following two functions.
Digipure function:
This function helps to create a natural looking
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges
from high-contrast and crisp images.
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,
edges are added to produce a sharper, more
detailed picture.
You can choose from the DigiPure function
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.
Picture motion compensation
function:
This function displays fast-moving pictures
(for example, the players or ball in a football
game) more smoothly and naturally on the
screen.
• You cannot select the Digipure function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
AUTO:
The TV will automatically adjust the level of
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of
noise in the picture, giving the best possible
picture.
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of
noise, this may actually make the noise
worse. It is recommended to use the
AUTO setting if you can.
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the
setting from AUTO to MIN.
• The MIN setting is not suitable for highquality pictures which contain very little
noise.
OFF:
The DigiPure function is turned off.
PULL DOWN
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema
film picture more smoothly and naturally on
the screen.
AUTO:
This function is turned on. Normally keep this
function set to AUTO.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
• The motion may appear unnatural when
viewing images with the NTSC colour
system. To make the motion smoother,
switch the PULL DOWN function from
AUTO to OFF.
• You cannot select this function in the
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in
picture mode.
MAX:
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality
has not been reproduced fully, change the
setting from AUTO to MAX.
• The MAX setting is not suitable for lowquality pictures which contain a lot of
noise.
22
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
22
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
COLOUR SYSTEM
The colour system is chosen automatically.
However, if the picture is not clear or no
colour appears, choose the colour system
manually.
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
You can change the screen size according to
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum
one of three ZOOM modes.
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the
MENU/OK button.
ZOOM
REGULAR
ZOOM
16:9
COLOUR SYSTEM
PAL
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to choose
the appropriate colour system.
Then press the MENU/OK
button.
• When changing to the COLOUR
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see
"Change the colour system of the SUBpicture" on page 15 for details.
• You can also operate the COLOUR
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR
SYSTEM button on the remote control.
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM
button" on page 11.
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a ZOOM mode. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
The picture expands and the chosen
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5
seconds.
• You can choose a ZOOM mode from
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.
• You cannot select the ZOOM function
when receiving the Progressive Video
Signal (525P signal).
PICTURE TILT
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic
force may make the picture tilt. If this
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then
press the MENU/OK button.
PICTURE TILT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons until the
picture becomes level. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
23
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
23
Black
4/9/02, 6:52 PM
Using the TV's menu
SOUND SETTING menu
SOUND SETTING
STEREO/
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
AI VOLUME
BBE
SPATIALIZER
SUPER BASS
HEADPHONE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
MONO
ON
ON
LIVE
ON
STEREO / I•II
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast
programme, you can choose the sound from
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,
you can change from stereo to mono sound
so that you can hear the broadcast more
clearly and easily.
: Stereo sound
: mono sound
: Bilingual I (sub I)
: Bilingual II (sub II)
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,
and the sound becomes monaural.
• The sound mode you can choose differs
depending on the TV programme.
• This function does not work in the VIDEO
modes.
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound to your liking.
BALANCE
You can adjust the volume balance between
the left and right speakers.
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.
AI VOLUME
You can prevent the sudden increase or
decrease of sound that occurs when
changing the channel to another channel or
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO
mode.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.
For example, you can set it to be OFF in
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.
If you set the AI VOLUME function while
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,
the setting is registered as the setting for
VIDEO mode.
• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate
as expected if the sound input level from
a broadcast station (or video software) is
extremely low.
BBE
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easyto-listen sound that is faithful to the original
sound recorded.
BASS
ON :
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
OFF :
TREBLE
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.
: weaker
: stronger
This function is turned on.
This function is turned off.
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE
is a registered trademark of BBE
Sound, inc.
24
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
24
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's Menu
SPATIALIZER
TV SPEAKER:
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER
modes.
• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "
on page 9.
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.
SUPER BASS
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)
function.
When this function is on, the TV’s speaker
does not shut off the sound even if headphones are connected.
If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker
does not output the sound when the
headphones are connected.
OUTPUT:
You can choose the sound from the MAINpicture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when
using the headphones.
• The TV’s speaker does not put out the
sound from the SUB-picture.
• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono
only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
HEADPHONE
This function enables you to output the TV’s
sound from your headphones.
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then
press MENU/OK button.
HEADPHONE
05
ON
MAIN
VOLUME
TV SPEAKER
OUTPUT
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Use the / button to select,
and the / button to set the
HEADPHONE function. Then
press the MENU/OK button.
VOLUME :
You can adjust the volume of the sound
output from your headphones.
25
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
25
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
FEATURES menu
BLUE BACK
FEATURES
SLEEP TIMER
BLUE BACK
CHILD LOCK
CHANNEL GUARD
AUTO SHUTOFF
VIDEO-3 SETTING
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
ON
OFF
OFF
COMPONENT
You can set the TV to automatically change
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no
input from an external device.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF:
This function is turned off.
SLEEP TIMER
You can set the TV to automatically turn off
after a set time.
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then
press the MENU/OK button.
SLEEP TIMER
0
120
CHILD LOCK
You can disable the front control buttons of
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the
TV can be operated only by using the remoto
control.
Use this function to prevent children from
operating the TV at their own discretion
(without parent consent).
OFF
ON :
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
This function is turned on.
OFF:
2 Press the / buttons to set the
period of time.
The TV begins count down from the set
time.
• You can set the period of time a
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10
minitue steps.
To cancel this function:
Press the button to set a period of time to
"OFF".
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
This function is turned off.
CHANNEL GUARD
When there is a TV channel you do not want
your children to watch, you can lock out the
channel. Even when a child chooses a
programme number for a locked out channel
the screen will change to blue and display
so the channel cannot be viewed.
To set this function
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then
press the number 0 (AV) button.
The menu disappers.
SET ID NO.
• One minute before this function turns off
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.
• This function cannot be used to turn off
the TV's main power.
26
0000
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
• When this function is on, you can display
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm
or change the remaining time.
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
26
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV’s menu
2 Set the ID number you want.
To choose a number:
Press the / buttons.
To view a locked TV
channel
1 Choose a programme number in
which a TV channel locked with
the number buttons or PR LIST.
To move a cursor:
Press the / buttons.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
The screen changes to blue and the
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.
CHANNEL GUARD
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH / CC
ID
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
5
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• You cannot choose a locked TV channel
with the / buttons.
GUARD
4 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
• The TV shows the TV programme which
the chosen TV channel is now
broadcasting.
5 Press the blue button to set this
function to the TV channel.
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the
TV channel is locked.
To cancel this function:
Press the blue button again.
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and
the lock is released.
6 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappears.
2 Press the DISPLAY button to
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber
input screen).
5
ID NO.:
3 Press the number buttons to
enter the ID number.
The lock is temporarily released so you
can view the TV channel.
If you have forgotten the ID number:
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".
After confirming the ID number, press the
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.
• When you would like to cancel the
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must
perform the operation " To set this
function" again.
27
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
27
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
AUTO SHUTOFF
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are
received for about 15 minutes or longer after
the end of a broadcast.
ON :
This function is turned on.
OFF :
This function is turned off.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not
turn off the TV's main power.
• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a
VIDEO mode.
VIDEO-3 SETTING
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly according to the video signal input from the external
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If
this setting is incorrect, images will not be
displayed.
VIDEO :
If a normal video signal (composite video
signal) is input.
COMPONENT :
If a Component video signal (Y/CB/CR
signals) is input.
• For detailed connecting methods, see
" Additional preparation " on page 36.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)
only when the component video signal is
input.
28
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
28
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV’s menu
INSTALL menu
AUTO PROGRAM
CH
INSTALL
LANGUAGE
AUTO PROGRAM
EDIT/MANUAL
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
OK
DISP
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press
the MENU/OK button.
:OK
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
:BACK
2 After the TV channels have been
stored in the programme number
list, the EDIT menu appears.
You can choose the language you want to
use for the on-screen display from the
language list in a menu.
TV
:OK
• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,
press the DISPLAY button.
LANGUAGE
OK
10
20%
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a language.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappers.
AUTO PROGRAM
• You can proceed to edit the programme
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"
on page 30.
• If a TV cannel you want to view is not
stored in the programme numbers list,
you can register it using the MANUAL
function.
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page
30.
You can automatically register the TV
channels which can be received well at
your residence in the TV's programme
numbers by performing the following.
• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not
store a TV channel to the programme
number 0 (AV).
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then
press the MENU/OK button.
• If you do not need to use the EDIT/
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK
button to exit from the EDIT menu.
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.
The TV channels you receive are
automatically stored in the programme
numbers list.
29
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
29
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
EDIT/MANUAL
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into
two types:
editing of the current programme numbers
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a
TV channel you want to view to the
programme number (MANUAL function).
This function adds a new TV channel in the
current programme numbers list by using the
CH/CC number.
DELETE :
This function deletes a unnecessary TV
Channel.
MANUAL :
CAUTION
• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT
function rewrites the current programme
numbers list.
Resultingly, the programme number of
some of the TV channels will change.
• When a TV channel which has been
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD
function, using the MANUAL function for
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL
GUARD function.
• When a TV channel has already been
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT
function deletes the TV channel.
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then
press the MENU/OK button.
This function manually registers a new TV
channel in a programme number.
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
• For programme number PR 0, "AV"
appears in the programme numbers list.
FUNCTIONS
MOVE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the button to start the
MOVE function.
EDIT
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
ID
INSERT
DELETE
MANUAL
MOVE :
This function changes a programme number
of a TV channel.
ID :
This function registers a Channel name (ID)
to a TV channel.
30
Black
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
21
22
23
24
25
26
CC
01
02
03
:BACK
STORE
2 Follow the operation description
of a function you want to use and
operate the function.
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
ID
DISP
MOVE
30
INSERT:
3 Press the / buttons to
choose a new programe number.
To cancel the MOVE function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the button to change the
programme number of a TV
channel to a new programme
number.
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV’s menu
ID
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the red button to start the
ID function.
3 Enter a channel name (ID).
Press the / buttons to
choose a character.
press the / buttons to move
the cursor.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
M
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
21
22
23
24
25
26
01(B/G)
02
03
SEARCH+
SEARCHFINE+
FINE-
SYSTEM
To cancel the MANUAL function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
3 Press the button to choose the
system (sound system) for a TV
channel you want to register.
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
MANUAL
21
22
23
24
25
26
01
02
03
• For the sound systems in each country
or region, see the table
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page
12.
To cancel the ID function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the MENU/OK button to
register a channel name to a TV
channel.
DELETE
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a TV channel.
2 Press the yellow button to delete
the TV channel.
The TV channel is deleted from the
programme numbers list.
MANUAL
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number to
which you want to register a new
TV channel.
2 Press the bule button to activate
the MANUAL function.
4 Press the green or red button to
search for a TV channel.
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV
channel. Then the TV channel is
displayed.
5 Press the green or red button
repeatedly until the to TV channel
you want appears.
If the TV channel reception is poor:
Press the bule or yerrow button to
finetune the TV channel.
If you cannot hear the normal sound
even when the picture of the TV channel
appers normally:
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the
button and choose a SYSTEM that has
normal sound.
6 Press the MENU/OK button and
register the TV channel to a
programme number.
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.
At the right side following the CH/CC
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of
the TV channel appears.
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
31
Black
31
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
INSERT
PREPARATION
• Find the CH/CC number corresponding
to the channel number of the TV channel
from the on page 33.
1 Press the / buttons to
choose a programme number for
which you will register a new TV
channel.
2 Press the green button to start
the INSERT function.
EDIT
PR
AV
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
ID
CH/CC
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CC
CC
CC
21
22
23
24
25
26
**
02
03
`-9
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
CH/CC
3 Press the / buttons to
choose "CC" or "CH" according
to the CH/CC number of the TV
channel.
To cancel the INSERT function:
Press the DISPLAY button.
4 Press the Number buttons to
enter the remaining CH/CC
number.
The TV shifts to registration mode.
When the registration is completed, the
picture of the TV channel appears on the
screen.
• The CH/CC number is a number
indicating the broadcast frequency to the
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV
channel corresponding to the broadcast
frequency indicated by the CH/CC
number, a picture in the no-signal state
appears.
32
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
32
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV’s menu
CH/CC number
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel
number of the TV channel from this table.
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.
Channel
CH
CH 02
CH 03
CH 04
CH 05
CH 06
CH 07
CH 08
CH 09
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16
CH 17
CH 18
CH 19
CH 20
CH 21
CH 22
CH 23
CH 24
CH 25
CH 26
CH 27
CH 28
CH 29
CH 30
CH 31
CH 32
CH 33
CH 34
CH 35
CH 36
CH 37
CH 38
CH 39
CH 40
CH 41
CH 42
CH 43
CH 44
CH 45
CH 46
CH 47
CH 48
CH 49
CH 50
CH 51
CH 52
CH 53
CH 54
CH 55
CH 56
CH 57
CH 58
CH 59
CH 60
CH 61
CH 62
CH 63
CH 64
CH 65
CH 66
CH 67
CH 68
CH 69
CH 70
US
US-2
US-3
US-4
US-5
US-6
US-7
US-8
US-9
US-10
US-11
US-12
US-13
US-14
US-15
US-16
US-17
US-18
US-19
US-20
US-21
US-22
US-23
US-24
US-25
US-26
US-27
US-28
US-29
US-30
US-31
US-32
US-33
US-34
US-35
US-36
US-37
US-38
US-39
US-40
US-41
US-42
US-43
US-44
US-45
US-46
US-47
US-48
US-49
US-50
US-51
US-52
US-53
US-54
US-55
US-56
US-57
US-58
US-59
US-60
US-61
US-62
US-63
US-64
US-65
US-66
US-67
US-68
US-69
CCIR
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
OIRT
R1
R2
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
E67
E68
E69
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
33
Black
AUSTRALIA
AU-0
AU-1
AU-2
AU-6
AU-7
AU-8
AU-9
AU-10
AU-11
CC
CC 01
CC 02
CC 03
CC 04
CC 05
CC 06
CC 07
CC 08
CC 09
CC 10
CC 11
CC 12
CC 13
CC 14
CC 15
CC 16
CC 17
CC 18
CC 19
CC 20
CC 21
CC 22
CC 23
CC 24
CC 25
CC 26
CC 27
CC 28
CC 29
CC 30
CC 31
CC 32
CC 33
CC 34
CC 35
CC 36
CC 37
CC 38
CC 39
CC 40
CC 41
CC 42
CC 43
CC 44
CC 45
CC 46
CC 47
CC 48
CC 49
CC 50
CC 51
CC 52
CC 53
CC 54
CC 55
CC 56
CC 57
CC 58
CC 59
CC 60
CC 61
CC 62
CC 63
CC 64
CC 75
CC 76
CC 77
CC 78
CC 79
CC 95
CC 96
CC 97
CC 98
CC 99
US
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1
W+2
W+3
W+4
W+5
W+6
W+7
W+8
W+9
W+10
W+11
W+12
W+13
W+14
W+15
W+16
W+17
W+18
W+19
W+20
W+21
W+22
W+23
W+24
W+25
W+26
W+27
W+28
Channel
CCIR
OIRT
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-20
S-21
S-22
S-23
S-24
S-25
S-26
S-27
S-28
S-29
S-30
S-31
S-32
S-33
S-34
S-35
S-36
S-37
S-38
S-39
S-40
S-41
X
Y
Z
Z+1
Z+2
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
R3
R4
R5
AUSTRALIA
AU-5
AU-5A
AU-3
AU-4
33
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
There are 4 types of teletext language
groups. Set the teletext language group that
corresponds to the language of the teletext
program that you want to watch.
• Languages that are not included in the
teletext language group that you select,
the sub-titles of the teletext program will
not be displayed properly.
1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,
then press the MENU/OK button.
TELETEXT LANGUAGE
GROUP-1
GROUP-2
GROUP-3
GROUP-4
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
2 Press the / buttons to
choose a group.
Group
Languages
Turkish, Hungarian, English,
GROUP-1 German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,
Swedish, Finnish
Polish, Serbian, Croatian,
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,
GROUP-2 Rumanian, Hungarian,
German, French, Italian,
Swedish, Finnish
Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,
Lithuanian, Estonian,
GROUP-3 Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,
English, German
Arabic, Czech, Slovak.
GROUP-4 Hungarian, English, German,
French, Italian, Spanish,
Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish
3 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the setting.
The menu disappears.
34
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
34
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Using the TV's menu
DEMO menu
DEMO
ON
OFF
OK
:OK
TV
:EXIT
DISP
:BACK
The DEMO function automatically demostrations some of the TV function.
When the DEMO function is set to
ON:
Each time the TV is turned on, the demonstration starts automatically.
If you do not want that to happen, set the
DEMO function to OFF.
1 Press the /
choose ON.
buttons to
To cancel the DEMO function,
choose off.
2 Press the MENU/OK button to
complete the settings.
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the
demostration will start.
To stop the demonstration:
Press one of the button on the remote
control.
35
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
35
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Additional preparation
Connecting the external
devices
Connect the devices to the TV, paying
attention to the following connection
diagram.
Before connecting anything:
• Read the manuals provided with the
devices. Depending on the devices, the
connection method may differ from the
figure. In addition, the device settings
may be changed depending on the
connection method to secure proper
operation.
(Behind the cover)
OVER
• Turn off all the devices including the TV.
S
V
L/MONO
R
IN (VIDEO-4)
• The "Specifications" on page 43 contains
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you
are connecting a device not listed in the
following connection diagram, see the
"Specifications" to choose the best
VIDEO terminal.
• Note that connecting cables are not
supplied.
• When connecting devices that are
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported
Devices" on page 38.
AUDIO
R
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
VCR (composite signal)
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
VCR for recording (composite signal)
DVD player (composite signal)
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
DVD player (component video signals;
Y/CB/CR)
TV game (composite signal)
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Camcorder (composite signal)
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)
Headphones
R
AUDIO
L/MONO VIDEO
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
36
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
R
AUDIO
L
AV COMPULINK
36
Black
Y/VIDEO
R AUDIO L/MONO
A AV COMPU LINK cable
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
S
OVER
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
VIDEO
Additional preparation
Connecting methods
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack
and the device's VIDEO OUT
(video output) jack with a video
cable.
If connecting a device to the TV
with an S-VIDEO cabel :
• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack
is indicated by "V".
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks
(L/MONO and R) and the
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R
output) jacks with an audio
cable.
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of
connecting with a video cable.
Note that the connection with a video cable
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO
cable.
If the device's sound output is in
mono :
If connecting a DVD player to the
TV with a component video
cable:
The signals of the images and sound you are
currently viewing with this TV are output
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can
record the currently shown image and sound
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, CB and CR) in
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's
COMPONENT (component video output)
jacks with a component video cables,
instead of connection with a video cable.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPONENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on
page 28.
• This Television is compatible with the
Progressive video signal (525P signal).
(When the component video signal is
input.)
If you have a DVD player that outputs
Progressive video signals (525P) as a
component video signal, then by
attaching the device to the television with
a component video cable you can see
the actual images that are recorded on a
DVD disc as an original image source.
If connecting a device to the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal
with a video cable:
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with
a video cables.
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page
28.
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
37
Black
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.
Connecting devices to the
OUTPUT terminal
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with
a video cable.
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R
input) jacks with an audio cable.
• When you turn off the TV, the signals from
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.
• The component signals input from the
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.
Connecting Headphones
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Headphone jack at the TV front panel.
37
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Additional preparation
Connecting AV COMPU
LINK Supported Devices
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a
system in which related devices are
automatically controlled when you operate
one device.
If you apply this system to the TV, you can
have the TV automatically perform the
required operations by operating one
external device. You don't have to use the
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or
change the VIDEO modes.
Examples of the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system operations
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images
from the device.
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a
VCR, you can view the tape.
Simply by operating the AV Control Receiver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed
correctly.
• The performance of the AC COMPU
LINK remote control system varies
depending on the connected device.
See the device’s instruction manual.
• When you select "TV SOUND" as the
input source with the AV Control
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's
MUTING function automatically operates
and the sound from the TV's speakers is
muted.
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+
buttons or the MUTING button on the
TV's remote control to cancel the MUTING function. You can regain the sound
from the TV's speakers.
Conditions to use the AV
COMPU LINK remote
control system
• A device equipped with an AV COMPU
LINK terminal is required.
• You must connect the TV and the device
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable
is unavailable, connect them with a cable
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at
both ends.
• You must connect the device to an
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system will not function
correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the
AV COMPU LINK remote control
system”.
• The TV must be in standby mode (the
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),
the AV COMPU LINK remote control
system does not function.
Setting up the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system
CAUTION:
• With some devices, the setup method
differs from the ones explained here.
Be sure to read the device’s instruction
manual thoroughly before setting it up.
1 Connect the device to the TV’s
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.
If you want to connect a DVD
player to the TV with a component video cable :
Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3
terminal.
• For detailed connecting instructions, see
"Connecting the external devices" on
page 36.
38
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
38
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Additional Preparation
2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU
LINK terminal and the device’s
AV COMPU LINK terminal with
an AV COMPU LINK cable.
3 Change the device’s setting
according to the VIDEO terminal
it is connected to.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-1 terminal :
Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-1 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD2.
If a VCR is connected to the
VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-2 terminal:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD3.
If a DVD player is connected to
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a
component video cable:
Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE
to DVD1.
• For instructions on how to change the
device’s setting, refer to the device’s
instruction manual.
• If the device you are connecting has
neither the remote control code nor the
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it
to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.
39
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
39
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Troubleshooting
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think
there is a problem with the TV itself.
Important:
• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.
• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the
rearcover of the TV.
If you cannot turn on
the TV
• Is the AC plug connected to the AC
outlet?
• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the
Main power button.
No picture/No sound
• Have you chosen a TV channel whose
reception is extremely bad? In this case,
the BLUE BACK function will be activated, the entire screen becomes blue, and
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you
want to view the TV channel, follow the
description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to
try to change the BLUE BACK function
setting to OFF.
• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct?
Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM
Button” on page 12 to try to solve the
trouble.
Poor picture
• If noise totally obscures the picture (snow), the aerial or aerial cable may have
trouble. Check the following to try to
solve the trouble :
Has the TV and aerial been
connected properly?
Has the aerial cable been damaged?
Is the aerial pointed to the right direction?
Is the aerial itself faulty?
• If the TV or aerial receives interference
from the other devices, stripes or noise
may appear in the picture. Move such
device as an amplifier, personal computer, or a hair drier that can cause interference away from your TV, or try changing its location. If the aerial suffers interference from a radio tower or highvoltage wire, please contact your local
dealer.
• If the TV receives interferences from
signal reflecting from mountains or
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will
occur.
Try to change the aerial’s direction or
replace the antenna with the one with
better directionality.
• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for
the TV channels correct? Follow the
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.
• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controlled properly? Follow the description
"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try
to adjust them properly.
• Videotaping teletext is not recommended
because it may not record correctly.
40
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
40
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Troubleshooting
• When a white and bright still image (such as a white dress) is displayed on the
screen, the white part may look as if it
were coloured.
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to
the nature of the picture tube itself, and
not due to a TV failure.
When the picture disappears from the
screen, the unnatural colours will also
disappear.
• When viewing images from commercially
available video softwear products, or videos from videotapes which have been
recored improperly, the top of the image
may be distored.
This is due to the condition of the video
signal, and not because of malfunction.
Poor sound
• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE
properly? If not, follow the description
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try
to adjust them properly.
• When the TV channel reception is poor, it
can be hard to hear the stereo or
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the
description "STEREO / I • II" on page 24
to hear the sound more easily by
changing it to a mono sound.
Operation disabled
• Have the batteries of the remote control
become exhausted?
Follow the description "Putting the
Batteries into the Remote Control" on
page 4 and replace them with new
batteries to try solve the problem.
• Have you attempted to use the remote
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at
a location more than seven meters apart
from the TV location? Operate the remote
control in the front of your TV or a
location less than seven meters from
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.
• When you are viewing a teletext programme, you cannot operate the menus.
Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the
teletext programme to the ordinary TV
programme to try operating the menus.
• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,
you cannot operate the TV with the front
control buttons of the TV. Follow the
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to
try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.
• If the TV operation becomes disabled
suddenly, press the Main power button
on the TV and turn off the main power.
Try to press the Main power button again
to turn on the main power. If the TV
returns to a normal state, it is not a
failure.
• The following functions do not operate
when receiving Progressive Video Signal
(525P signal);
Remote control function:
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and
STROBE BUTTON
MENU function:
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure
and ZOOM
Other concerns
• When the SLEEP TIMER function or
AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the
TV is automatically turned off.
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to
press the POWER button to turn on the
TV once again. At this time, if the TV
resumes a normal state, there is no
problem.
• If you do not want sound emitted from
the TV’s speakers when using
headphones, change the TV SPEAKER
setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.
For details, see “HEADPHONE” on page
25.
41
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
41
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Troubleshooting
• If you bring a magnetised device such
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture
may be warped or unnatural colours
appear at the corners of the screen.
In this case, keep the device apart from
your TV. If the speaker causes such
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded
speaker instead.
• A picture may be tilted due to the influence of the earth's magnetism. In this
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page
23 to complete the tilt.
• It takes a short period of time from the
time an operation such as changing
channels is performed until an image is
displayed. This is not a malfunction.
This is the time required for the image to
stabilize before it can be displayed.
• The TV may emit a crackling sound due
to a sudden change in temperature. It
does not matter if a picture or sound
does not show any abnormality. If you
hear crackling sounds frequently while
you are viewing the TV, other causes may
be assumed.
For precautionary purposes, request
your service technician to inspect it.
• Touching the screen may cause you feel
a slight electric shock due to its static
electricity.
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to
the construction of the picture tube. It is
not a problem with the TV.
You can rest assured that this static discharge does not have harmful influence
over the human boby.
42
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
42
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
Specifications
Broadcasting systems
Colour systems
Channels and frequencies
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz
UHF channel (U)
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system
FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)
Please see the table in the description
"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.
RCA connector X 5
• Video input/Component video (Y/CB/CR) input and Audio
L/R inputs are available.
• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1
• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs
are available.
RCA connector X 3
• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm
HV-34LPZ : 75kg
HV-29LPZ : 48kg
Sound-multiplex systems
Teletext systems
Lauguages displayed by
teletext
Power requirements
Audio output
VIDEO-1 terminal
VIDEO-2 terminal
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT
terminal
VIDEO-4 terminal
OUTPUT terminal
Headphone jack
Accessories
Speakers
Power consumption
Screen size
(measured diagonally)
Dimensions(W X H X D)
Weight
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of
copyright.
43
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
43
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1218-001A-H_p22-44
44
Black
4/9/02, 6:53 PM
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
1
Black
LCT1218-001A-H
0402-Ki-NV-JMT
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
Благодарим за покупку цветного телевизора JVC.
Перед началом использования, пожалуйста, внимательно прочтите это
руководство, чтобы понять как пользоваться Вашим новым телевизором.
ОСТОРОЖНО:
ВО ИЗБЕЖАНИЕ ПОЖАРА И ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРОТОКОМ,
НЕ ДОПУСКАЙТЕ ДЕЙСТВИЯ НА ТЕЛЕВИЗОР ДОЖДЯ ИЛИ ВЛАГИ.
ВНИМАНИЕ:
ПРИ ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИИ ТЕЛЕВИЗОРА СОБЛЮДАЙТЕ
СЛЕДУЮЩИЕ ПРАВИЛА ЛИЧНОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Подключайте телевизор только к источникам питания, параметры которых
соответствуют параметрам, указанным на задней стенке телевизора.
Не допускайте повреждений шнура и вилки питания. При отключении телевизора от
сети выньте вилку из розетки, держась за вилку, а не за шнур.
Ни в коем случае не перегораживайте и не закрывайте вентиляционные отверстия.
Ни в коем случае не устанавливайте
телевизор в местах с плохой
вентиляцией.
15 cm
При установке телевизора оставьте
вентиляционные зазоры по
периметру, величина зазоров должна
быть не меньше показанных на рис
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
значений.
Не допускайте попадания предметов или жидкости в отверстия корпуса.
В случае неисправности выньте вилку питания из розетки и вызовите мастера.
Не пытайтесь отремонтировать телевизор самостоятельно, не открывайте заднюю крышку.
Поверхность экрана телевизора может быть легко повреждена. При обращении с
телевизором соблюдайте предельную осторожность. Если экран загрязнится,
протрите его мягкой сухой тканью. Ни в коем случае не нажимайте сильно на экран.
Ни в коем случае не используйте чистящие или моющие средства.
Если Вы не собираетесь пользоваться телевизором в течение длительного времени,
обязательно отключите его от сетевой розетки.
2
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
2
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
Настройка телевизора
ВНИМАНИЕ
• èÂ‰ ͇ÍËÏ-ÎË·Ó ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚÂ
‚Ò˛ ‡ÔÔ‡‡ÚÛÛ, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒΠÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.
1 Подсоединение антенны и ВМ
• ÄÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË ÌÂ
‚ıÓ‰ËÚ. àÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚È 75-éÏ
ÍÓ‡ÍÒˇθÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ.
рис. A
• èÂ‰ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ Çå.
Если ВМ не подсоединяется (см. рис. A):
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
Если ВМ подсоединяется (см. рис. B):
1 Подсоедините антенный кабель к
входному гнезду антенны ВМ и
соедините ВМ и телевизор друг с
другом с помощью другого
антенного кабеля.
2 Соедините видеокабелем гнездо
VIDEO OUT (выход видео)
видеомагнитофона и гнездо
VIDEO (видео) телевизора.
рис. В
Для соединения ВМ с телевизором с помощью
кабеля S-VIDEO выполните следующее:
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ë ‡Á˙ÂÏ S ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl S-VIDEO A, ‡ Ì ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
3 Соедините гнезда VIDEO OUT (L/R
аудиовыходы) видеомагнитофона и
гнезда AUDIO (L/МОNО и R)
телевизора с помощью аудиокабеля.
• ÖÒÎË ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl
ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ, ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO
OUT (‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ë
„ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO L/MONO (‡Û‰ËÓ Î/ÏÓÌÓ)
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‡Û‰ËÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
• ÖÒÎË Çå ËÏÂÂÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AV COMPU LINK,
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÓÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ AV
COMPU LINK. ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK” ̇ ÒÚ. 38.
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
3
Black
3
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
2 Подсоединение шнура питания
Вставьте вилку шнура в сетевую розетку.
3 Установка батареек в пульт
дистанционного управления
ÇÓÁ¸ÏËÚ 2 ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË AA/R6.
Встаьте батареи, начиная с кнопца, помеченного
знаком
и соблюдая полярности
и
.
• ëӷ≇ÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ ·ÂÁÓÔ‡ÒÌÓÒÚË,
Û͇Á‡ÌÌ˚ ̇ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈ͇ı.
• ÖÒÎË ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
ÌÓχθÌÓ Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ, Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË.
• ŇڇÂÈÍË, ‚ıÓ‰fl˘Ë ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË,
Ô‰̇Á̇˜ÂÌ˚ ÚÓθÍÓ ‰Îfl ̇ÒÚÓÈÍË Ë
ÔÓ‚ÂÍË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. á‡ÏÂÌËÚ ˝ÚË ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË
Í‡Í ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÍÓÂÂ.
4 Выполнение
первоначальных настроек
èË ÔÂ‚ÓÏ ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ
ÔÂ‚Ó̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl
ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.
1 Нажмите кнопку включения питания
телевизора
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl Ë ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.
• ÖÒÎË Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒfl
Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï Ë Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÁÂÎÂÌ˚Ï, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ,
˜ÚÓ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇ıÓ‰ËÚÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ
POWER ̇ ÔÛθÚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.
• ÖÒÎË ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ, ˜ÚÓ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÛÊ ‚Íβ˜‡ÎÒfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‰Îfl
‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËfl ̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ ‚ÓÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚÂÒ¸
ÙÛÌ͈ËflÏË “üáõä” Ë “ÄÇíé èêéÉ”. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“åÂÌ˛
çÄëíêéâäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 29.
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
Индикатор питания
POWER
Кнопка
выключателя
сети
2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛ üáõä. Ç˚·ÂËÚ ӉËÌ ËÁ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚
ËÁ ÔÓfl‚Ë‚¯Â„ÓÒfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÔËÒ͇.
OK
TV
DISP
4
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
4
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
3 Нажимая кнопки / , выберите
РУССКИЙ. После этого нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
POWER
TV/VIDEO
PICTURE
MODE
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
ÇÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ.
èËÌËχÂÏ˚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚
·Û‰ÛÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸Òfl ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ‚ˉ ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
RETURN
VOLUME
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ. ̇ÊÏËÚÂ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
4 После сохранения телеканалов в
списке номеров программ появится
меню НАСТРОЙКА.
PIP
SUB-P
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• èÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ ‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÒÔËÒÓÍ
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË
çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“çÄëíêéâäÄ/
Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
TEXT
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍÂ
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ
Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ. Ì ÒÓı‡ÌflÂÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚
̇ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0 (AV).
• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ Ì ÌÛÊ̇, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK
‰Îfl Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËfl ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.
На этом настройка заканчивается.
Новый телевизор JVC к Вашим услугам!
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
5
Black
5
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
Кнопки и функции телевизора
Включение питания
Нажмите кнопку питания 1 .
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 Á‡„ÓËÚÒfl Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï
Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÓȉÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.
ÑÎfl ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl :
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 ÔÓ„‡ÒÌÂÚ.
Включение телевизора,
находящегося в режиме
ожидания
Нажмите одну из кнопок CHANNEL
m5.
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 ËÁÏÂÌËÚ ˆ‚ÂÚ Ò
Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó Ì‡ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl.
• ç‡ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸
̇ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO 3 .
82
1
7
9
Выбор телеканала
Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL m 5 .
Выбор панели ВИДЕО
Нажимайте кнопки TV/VIDEO 3 или
CHANNEL m 5 .
Регулировка громкости
Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m 4 .
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÛÓ‚Ìfl „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË.
Кнопка MENU 6
(За крышкой)
OVER
S
V
L/MONO
IN (VIDEO-4)
0
-
R
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
65 43
ç‡ÊËÏÓÏ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÂÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡”
̇ ÒÚ. 19.
Датчик пульта
дистанционного
управления и ЭКО-сенсор 9
Индикатор ECО 7
ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ñàîêéÇéâ
ùäéëÖçëéê ̇ Çäã ËÎË ÑàëèãÖâ, Á‡„ÓËÚÒfl
Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ECé.
6
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
6
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
Индикатор SPATIALIZER 8
ùÚÓÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ Á‡„Ó‡ÂÚÒfl, ÂÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸
ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ SPATIALIZER ̇ åéçé ËÎË LIVE.
Гнездо головного
телефона 0
AUDIO
R
ÑÎfl ÔÓ‰Íβ˜ÂÌËfl „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ÒÚÂÂÓ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ
3,5 ÏÏ).
èË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚
ÒΉÛÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ, Ô˂‰ÂÌÌ˚Ï ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.
S
L/MONO VIDEO
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CB
CR
Y/VIDEO
VIDEO-3
COMPONENT
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
OUTPUT
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
Панель VIDEO-1 =
AUDIO
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3 Ë 36.
S
L/MONO VIDEO
R
OVER
VIDEO-1
VIDEO-2
CR
CB
Y/VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L/MONO
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT
!
OUTPUT
@
VIDEO
AV COMPU LINK
$
=
~
Панель VIDEO-2 ~
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.
Панель VIDEO-3/
COMPONENT !
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 28 Ë 36.
#
Панель VIDEO-4 • ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.
Панель OUTPUT @
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.
Гнездо антенны #
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ.
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3.
Панель AV COMPU LINK $
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36 Ë 38.
7
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
7
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
Кнопки и функции пульта дистанционного управления
Включение телевизора,
находящегося в режиме ожидания
Нажмите кнопку POWER.
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
ñ‚ÂÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒfl Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó
̇ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl.
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• íÂ΂ËÁÓ, ̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl,
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ̇ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍË
CHANNEL m ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË.
Для выключения телевизора:
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ POWER.
ñ‚ÂÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒfl Ò ÁÂÎÂÌÓ„Ó
̇ Í‡ÒÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÓȉÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.
0
RETURN
Выбор телеканала
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚, ÔÓ‰ ÍÓÚÓ˚Ï ·˚Î
Á‡ÔÓÏÌÂÌ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.
Нажимайте кнопку CHANNEL m или
введите номер программы (ПР) с помощью
кнопок с номерами.
PIP
SUB-P
NEXT
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌÓ ‚‚ÂÒÚË ‰‚ÛÁ̇˜Ì˚È ÌÓÏÂ, ̇ÊÏËÚÂ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ -/-- ‰Îfl ÔÂÂıÓ‰‡ ̇ ‰‚ÛÁ̇˜ÌÛ˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ.
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
STROBE
FREEZE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
• ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ èêéÉ. ãàëí.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“äÌÓÔ͇ DISPLAY” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.
• ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌˠ̘ÂÚÍÓ ËÎË ÌÂÚ Á‚Û͇, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
• ÖÒÎË Á‚ÛÍ ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚‡ Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ‰‡ÊÂ
ÔË ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËË ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ,
‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ SOUND
SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
TEXT
Регулирование громкости
Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m.
• ÉÓÏÍÓÒÚ¸ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ˝ÚËÏË ÍÌÓÔ͇ÏË ÌÂ
„ÛÎËÛÂÚÒfl. ëΉÛÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.
Просмотр изображения с
внешнего устройства
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ԇÌÂθ VIDEO, ˜ÂÂÁ ÍÓÚÓÛ˛
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÚÒfl ‚̯Ì ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó.
8
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
8
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Нажмите кнопку TV/VIDEO.
• è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÍÌÓÔÓÍ CHANNEL m ËÎË ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ èêéÉ.
ãàëí.
Для возврата к телеканалу:
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍÛ CHANNEL m
ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ.
Кнопка MUTING
Кнопка MUTING используется для
выключения звука. Повторный
нажим кнопки MUTING приводит к
включению звука на той же
громкости, которая была до
выключения звука.
Кнопка ZOOM
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÙÓχڇ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl
ÙÓχڇ. Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÓÔÚËχθÌ˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.
Для выбора режима нажмите кнопку
ZOOM.
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ZOOM, ̇
˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ZOOM ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
16:9
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3) ‚
¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÙÓχÚ
16:9).
• ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl ‰Îfl
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÙÓχÚÓÏ 16:9,
ÒʇÚ˚ı ‰Ó Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÙÓχڇ
(ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3), ÓÌ ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎflÂÚ
‚ÓÒÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂ‚Ó̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚È ÙÓχÚ.
Кнопка SPATIALIZER
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” (Live) ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound
(ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).
Нажмите кнопку SPATIALIZER
для выбора режима.
LIVE:
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚Û͇
‚ ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ Ò Û‚Â΢ÂÌÌÓÈ
„ÎÛ·ËÌÓÈ Ë ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÏË ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ‡ÏË.
НОРМАЛЬНОЕ
MOНO:
àÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó,
ÌÂËÁÏÂÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3).
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÏÓÌÓÁ‚Û͇ ‚
Á‚ÛÍ, ËÏËÚËÛ˛˘ËÈ ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓÂ
Á‚Û˜‡ÌËÂ.
ВЫКЛ:
ùÚÓ ÂÊËÏ ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl.
ZOOM
åÓÊÌÓ ÛÍÛÔÌËÚ¸ ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9), Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ÓÌÓ
Á‡ÔÓÎÌËÚ ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì.
• êÂÊËÏ LIVE ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ
ÚÓθÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚Û͇.
• êÂÊËÏ LIVE Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËË ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.
• êÂÊËÏ MOçO ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ
ÚÓθÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÌÓÁ‚Û͇.
• ã‚˚È Ë Ô‡‚˚È Í‡fl ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓ„Ó
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9) ·Û‰ÛÚ ÓÚÂÁ‡Ì˚.
ëËÒÚÂχ SPATIALIZER ËÁ„ÓÚÓ‚ÎÂ̇ ÔÓ
ÎˈÂÌÁËË ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË Desper Products,Inc.
9
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
9
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Кнопка BASS
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëìèÖê ÅÄë.
Для включения и выключения
функции СУПЕР БАС нажимайте
кнопку BASS.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
Кнопка PICTURE MODE
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‰Îfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
Для выбора режима нажимайте
кнопку PICTURE MODE.
ЯРКИЙ :
èÓ‚˚¯‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.
СТАНДАРТ :
Ñ·ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
Òڇ̉‡ÚÌ˚ÏË.
МЯГКИЙ :
ëÏfl„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.
Кнопка RETURN+
äÌÓÔ͇ RETURN+ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌflÂÚ ‰‚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË:
ÇéáÇêÄí+ Ë ÇéáÇêÄí.
ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÁ‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì ͇Í
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ, ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇéáÇêÄí+.
ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì ͇Í
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ, ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇéáÇêÄí.
Функция ВОЗВРАТ+ :
á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡‚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚È
ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Í‡Í “ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ,
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π‚ β·ÓÈ
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÔÛÚÂÏ Ì‡ÊËχ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+.
10
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
10
Black
Для регистрации телеканала как
“Возвращаемый телеканал” :
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,
̇Á̇˜ÂÌÌ˚È ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·,
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËÚ ÂÂ
̇ʇÚÓÈ ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË Ì ÏÂÌ 3 ÒÂÍÛ̉.
èÓfl‚ÎÂÌË ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ̇‰ÔËÒË “ÇéáÇêÄí
äÄçÄãÄ áÄèêéÉêÄååàêéÇÄç!”
ÔÓ‰Ú‚Âʉ‡ÂÚ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌË „ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.
Для отмены регистрации телеканала как
“возвращаемого” :
ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ β·Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËÚ ÂÂ
̇ʇÚÓÈ ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË Ì ÏÂÌ 3 ÒÂÍÛ̉.
ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ “ÇéáÇêÄí
äÄçÄãÄ éíåÖçÖç!”, ˜ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÛ
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.
• èË ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËfl “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏÓ„Ó
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·” ÓÚÏÂÌflÂÚÒfl.
• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚ ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ Ë Í‡ÍÓÈ-ÎË·Ó
‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, Ò̇˜‡Î‡ ‚˚·ÂËÚ ˝ÚÓÚ
‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó Ì‡ÊËÏÓÏ
ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ̇ “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È”
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.í‡ÍËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl
ÏÂÊ‰Û ‰‚ÛÏfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·ÏË.
Функция ВОЗВРАТ :
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Á‡ÔÓÏË̇ÂÚ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÓÒΉÌËÏ
ÔÂ‰ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓÏ, Í‡Í “èÓÒΉÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ.
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÊ‰Û ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚
‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓÏ Ë “èÓÒΉÌËÈ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ.
• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ‰‚‡
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ Ò
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÇéáÇêÄí,
‚˚·ÂËÚ Ò̇˜‡Î‡ Ó‰ËÌ, ‡ Á‡ÚÂÏ
‚ÚÓÓÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò
ˆËÙ‡ÏË. ÖÒÎË ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÌÂ
ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ÍÌÓÔÍË Ò ˆËÙ‡ÏË, ‚
͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â “èÓÒΉÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ ÏÓÊÂÚ
Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl Ì ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î,
ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÂ‚˚Ï.
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Кнопка
/
èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÏÓÊÌÓ
‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË üÁ˚Í 1
(Bilingual I (Sub I)) ËÎË üÁ˚Í 2 (Bilingual II (Sub II)).
èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎflˆËË
ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îfl
ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËfl ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚Û͇.
Нажмите кнопку
/ для
выбора режима звучания.
: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËfl
: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËfl
: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)
Выбор телеканала или
панели ВИДЕО.
1 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для
отображения ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.
2 Кнопками / и /
выберите номер программы
или панели ВИДЕО. Затем
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
• êfl‰ÓÏ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ èêéÉ
ãàëí, ‰Îfl ÍÓÚÓ˚ı Á‡‰‡Ì‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl àÑ
çéåÖê, ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÁÌ‡Í ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË
.
• çÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎÂÈ ÇàÑÖé
„ËÒÚËÛ˛ÚÒfl ÔÓÒΠÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ Ò
ÌÓÏÂÓÏ èP 99.
: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)
МОНО : éÚÏÂÌflÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ
ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ.
• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËfl Á‡‚ËÒflÚ
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËχı
ÇàÑÖé.
Кнопка DISPLAY
чÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ
èêéÉ. ãàëí, ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ËÎË
ÌÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé.
Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY.
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË DISPLAY ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í
ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÏÛ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ËÌÙÓχˆËË Ì‡
˝Í‡ÌÂ.
Кнопка COLOUR SYSTEM
ëËÒÚÂχ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË, o‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ
̘ÂÚÍÓ ËÎË Ìˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.
Для выбора системы цветности
используйте кнопку COLOUR
SYSTEM.
АВТО :
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ‡ÒÔÓÁ̇‚‡ÌËÂ
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ Ò˄̇ÎÛ.
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â Ò˄̇· ‡·ÓÚ‡
ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé ÏÓÊÂÚ Ì‡Û¯ËÚ¸Òfl. èË
ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ
ÄÇíé ‚˚·ÂËÚ ‰Û„Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ‡ÒÔÓÁ̇ÂÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ Ò˄̇ÎÛ Ë
‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË.
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ ëàëíÖåõ ñÇÖíçéëíà
‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (SUBpicture), ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 15.
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚
‡Á΢Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı Ë „ËÓ̇ı, Û͇Á‡Ì˚
‚ Ú‡·Îˈ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ
ëàëíÖåõ” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
11
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
11
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Кнопка SOUND SYSTEM
ëËÒÚÂχ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl
(Sound System) ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË.
é‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ
ÒÎ˚¯ÌÓ Ò ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ÔË ÌÓχθÌÓÏ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.
ТЕЛЕВЕЩАТЕЛЬНЫЕ
СИСТЕМЫ
èÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ú‡·Îˈ‡Ï ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl Ë ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË,
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚ ‚‡¯ÂÏ „ËÓÌÂ.
Для выбора нужной системы
звукового сопровождения
нажимайте кнопку SOUND
SYSTEM.
B/G : ÒËÒÚÂχ B/G
I
: ÒËÒÚÂχ I
D/K : ÒËÒÚÂχ D/K
M
: ÒËÒÚÂχ M
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ
ÇàÑÖé.
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl,
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚ ‡Á΢Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı
Ë „ËÓ̇ı, Ô˂‰ÂÌ˚ ‚ Ú‡·ÎˈÂ
“íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ ëàëíÖåõ” ̇
ÒÚ. 12.
12
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
12
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Кнопка FREEZE
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÒÚÓÔ͇‰‡ ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ‚ˉÂ
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
Нажмите кнопку FREEZE.
Для отмены функции
ЗАМОРОЗИТЬ :
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE.
• äÓ„‰‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÏÂÂÚÒfl
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË Ë
ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ FREEZE
ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÌÂθÁfl.
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl FREEZE
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
• äÓ„‰‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÏÂÂÚÒfl
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË Ë
ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ
STROBE ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÌÂθÁfl.
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl
STROBE ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
• ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÚÓ̇θÌÓÒÚË ñÇ. íéç ÌÂ
ÏÓ„ÛÚ ·˚Ú¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˚ ‰Îfl ÌÂÔÓ‰‚ËÊÌ˚ı
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ‰‡Ê ÔË
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÂ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC.
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ÙÛÌ͈ËË MULTI
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ ̇
˝Í‡Ì ÌÂÒÍÓθÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÚÂÏ,
˜ÚÓ·˚ ӷ΄˜ËÚ¸ ‚˚·Ó ̇˷ÓÎÂÂ
ËÌÚÂÂÒÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.
1 Нажмите кнопку MULTI.
Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ̇ÊËÏÓ‚ ÍÌÓÔÍË MULTI
˝Í‡Ì ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚÒfl ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ
Ó·‡ÁÓÏ.
Кнопка STROBE
ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔ͇ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ‚ˉ 15
ÔÓÒΉӂ‡ÚÂθÌ˚ı ÒÚÓÔ-͇‰Ó‚.
Peжим MULTI из 5 изобрaжeний
1
2
1
Нажмите кнопку STROBE.
3
4
5
Peжим MULTI из 16 изобрaжeний
Для отмены функции STROBE :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE ‰Îfl ‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í
ÉãÄÇçéåì ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌ˲.
• èË Ò··ÓÏ Ò˄̇ΠÉãÄÇçéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÒÚÓÔ-͇‰˚
‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚Ó‰flÚÒfl Ò ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËflÏË.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
16
Oтмена Функции MULTI
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
13
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
13
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Для вызова на экран следующего
изображения Multi :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ NEXT.
2 Выберите изображение с
помощью кнопок / и / , а
затем нажмите кнопку MENU/
OK.
ùÍ‡Ì ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ̇ ‚˚·‡ÌÌ˚È
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠËÎË ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ÙÛÌ͈ËË PIP
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ„Ó
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‰‚Ûı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ (ÉãÄÇç Ë
ÇíéêéëíÖè).
Нажмите кнопку PIP.
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË PIP ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ̇
˝Í‡Ì ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:
• çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, ̇ ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌË͇ÍËÂ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ Ì Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì˚, Ë
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, ‰Îfl ÍÓÚÓ˚ı
̇Á̇˜Â̇ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl àÑ çéåÖê, ÌÂ
ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒfl.
• Ç˚ÔÓÎÌflÚ¸ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛, Ú‡ÍË ͇Í
„ÛÎËӂ͇ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚, ÌÂθÁfl. ÑÎfl ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËfl
ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Ò ÏÂÌ˛ ÓÚÏÂÌËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛
MULTI.
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MULTI, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl MULTI
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
• Ç Ú˜ÂÌË ÌÂÔÓ‰ÓÎÊËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó
ÔÂËÓ‰‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ„Ó ‰Îfl
Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËfl ‰ËÒÔÎÂfl ÏÌÓ„Ó˜ËÒÎÂÌÌ˚ı
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ
·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Ó‚‡Ú¸.
2
5
• ëÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ӉÌÓÈ Ë ÚÓÈ ÊÂ
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ (ËÎË ˜ÂÂÁ Ó‰ÌÛ Ë ÚÛ ÊÂ
Ô‡ÌÂθ ÇàÑÖé) Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Í‡Í
ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ÌÂθÁfl.
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ Ò˄̇ΠÉãÄÇçéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò˄̇ΠÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ Ú‡ÍÊ ·˚Ú¸ ÔÎÓıËÏ.
• ÖÒÎË Òڇ̉‡Ú˚ ÓÒÌÓ‚ÌÓ„Ó Ë
‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‡Á΢Ì˚,
Ëı ‚ÂıÌËÂ Ë ÌËÊÌË ˜‡ÒÚË ÏÓ„ÛÚ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ¸.
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË PIP ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl
ZOOM Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ.
• ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÌÂθÁfl
ÔÓÎÛ˜ËÚ¸ ‚ ‚ˉ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó Ò˄̇·
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PIP, ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl
PIP ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
14
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
14
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
Выбор телеканала для
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО
изображения
Нажмите кнопку SUB-P m.
Прослушивание звукового
сопровождения
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО
изображения
á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚, ÔË
˝ÚÓÏ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË éëçéÇçéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ·Û‰ÂÚ ÔÂ‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òfl ˜ÂÂÁ
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“çAìôçàKà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.
Изменение системы
цветности
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО
изображения
1 Когда на экране имеется
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОЕ
изображение, нажмите кнопку
MENU/OK для вызова на экран
МЕНЮ (основное меню).
2 Нажмите кнопки / и /
для выборы СВОЙСТВА
ИЗОБРАЖЕНИЯ, а затем
кнопку MENU/OK.
3 Нажмите кнопку / для
выборы СИСТЕМА ЦВЕТНОСТИ,
а затем кнопку MENU/OK.
4 Нажмите кнопку / для
выбора ВТОРОСТЕП, а затем
кнопку / для выбора нужной
системы цветности. После этого
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
• àÁÏÂÌflÚ¸ ëàëíÖåì ñÇÖíçéëíà
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛθڇ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÌÂθÁfl.
Кнопка POSITION
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÔË
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÂÊËχ “PeÊËÏ Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl”.
Нажимайте кнопку POSITION.
èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ Ì‡ÊËÏ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ·Û‰ÂÚ
ÔÂÂÏ¢‡Ú¸Òfl ‚ ̇Ô‡‚ÎÂÌËË ÔÓÚË‚
˜‡ÒÓ‚ÓÈ ÒÚÂÎÍË.
Кнопка SWAP
ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔ͇ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÏÂÌflÚ¸ ÏÂÒÚ‡ÏË
ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
Нажмите кнопку SWAP.
• ç ̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SWAP ÔË
Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌËË ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ̇ Çå –
˝ÚÓ Ô˂‰ÂÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó
Ò˄̇· ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
15
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
15
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
èÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚
Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ
1 Выберите телеканал с
телетекстом.
2 Нажмите кнопку TV/TEXT.
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/TEXT ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ÂÊËÏ
ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:
Кнопка HOLD
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËfl (HOLD)
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÍÓθ
Û„Ó‰ÌÓ ‰Ó΄Ó, ‰‡Ê ÍÓ„‰‡ ÔËÌËχÂÚÒfl
ÌÂÒÍÓθÍÓ ‰Û„Ëı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.
Нажмите кнопку HOLD
Ç Î‚ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
Для отмены функции Hold :
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ HOLD.
Кнопка REVEAL
ç‡ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡
ËÏÂÂÚÒfl ÒÍ˚Ú˚È ÚÂÍÒÚ (̇ÔËÏÂ, ÓÚ‚ÂÚ˚
̇ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ‚ËÍÚÓËÌ˚).
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì
ÒÍ˚ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÍÒÚ‡.
При каждом нажиме на кнопку
REVEAL текст исчезает или
появляется.
3 Выберите страницу телетекста
с помощью кнопок CHANNEL
m, кнопок с цифрами или
цветных кнопок.
Для возврата к режиму ТВ :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/TEXT ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/
VIDEO.
• ÖÒÎË ‚ÓÁÌË͇˛Ú ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í
ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ ËÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ
ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË.
• Ç ÂÊËÏ íÂÍÒÚ ZOOM Á‡ÙËÍÒËÓ‚‡Ì
̇ ÂÊËÏ çéêåÄãúçéÖ.
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛
‚˚ÔÓÎÌflÚ¸ ÌÂθÁfl.
• èË Ì‚ÂÌÓÏ ‚˚‚Ӊ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì
ÒËÏ‚ÓÎÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËÁÏÂÌËÚÂ
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ.
èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ҂‰ÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰
Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” ̇ ÒÚ.
34.
Кнопка SIZE
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Û‚Â΢ÂÌËfl ‚˚ÒÓÚ˚
‰ËÒÔÎÂfl ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚‰‚ÓÂ.
Нажмите кнопку SIZE.
Кнопка INDEX
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ï„ÌÓ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó
‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÒÓ‰ÂʇÌËfl.
Нажмите кнопку INDEX.
• Ç ÂÊËÏ ëÔËÒÓÍ ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òfl Í
ÒÚ‡ÌˈÂ, ÌÓÏÂ ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒfl
‚ ΂ÓÏ ÌËÊÌÂÏ Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.
Кнопка CANCEL
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÒ͇ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.
1 Нажимая кнопки с цифрами,
введите номер страницы или
нажмите цветную кнопку.
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ ËÒ͇ڸ ÒÚ‡ÌˈÛ
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.
16
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
16
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
.
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
2 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL.
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡Ïχ. äÓ„‰‡
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇ȉÂÚ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÛ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡,
 ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ‚ ΂ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ
Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.
3 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL для
возврата к странице
телетекста, когда ее номер
появится на экране.
• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË CANCEL ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òfl
‚ ÂÊËÏ íÇ ÌÂθÁfl.
Кнопка SUBPAGE
çÂÍÓÚÓ˚ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËϲÚ
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÏ˚Â
ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚. àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËfl ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÎË ÂÂ
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‚ β·ÓÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.
1 Нажмите кнопку SUBPAGE
для включения функции
Подстраница.
çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒfl ‚
ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡.
Цвет*
ÜÂÎÚ˚È
ÅÂÎ˚È
ëËÌËÈ ËÎË
Í‡ÒÌ˚È
Состояние подстраницы
ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ ̇ÒÚÓfl˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ.
åÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì.
ç ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ ̇
˝Í‡Ì Ë Ì ÔÓÒ·̇.
* : ñ‚ÂÚ ÙÓ̇, ̇ ÍÓÚÓÓÏ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒfl
ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚.
2 Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL
m для выбора номера
подстраницы.
Использование режима
Список
Ç˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸ ÌÓÏÂ‡ β·ËÏ˚ı
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË Ë ·˚ÒÚÓ
‚˚Á˚‚‡Ú¸ Ëı ËÁ Ô‡ÏflÚË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚ı
ÍÌÓÔÓÍ.
Для сохранения номеров страниц :
1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для
входа в режим Список.
Ç ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÓÚÓ·‡ÁflÚÒfl
Ëϲ˘ËÂÒfl ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ.
2 С помощью цветной кнопки
выберите номер (позицию).
Затем с помощью кнопок с
цифрами введите номер
страницы.
3 Нажмите и удержите кнопку
STORE.
óÂÚ˚ ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ·Û‰ÛÚ ÏË„‡Ú¸
̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ˜ÚÓ Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌË Ëı ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË.
Для вызова сохраненной страницы :
1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для
входа в режим Список.
2 Нажмите цветную кнопку, для
которой был назначен нужный
номер страницы.
Для выхода из режима Список :
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MODE
Для отмены функции Подстраница :
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SUBPAGE.
17
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
17
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
Как пользоваться меню телевизора
êfl‰ÓÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÏÂÌ˛.
óÚÓ·˚ ËÏÂÚ¸ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ‚ÒÂı ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ıÓÓ¯Ó
Á̇ڸ ÔË̈ËÔ˚ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÂÌ˛.
Основные операции
POWER
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS
PICTURE
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK для
вызова МЕНЮ (основного меню).
0
RETURN
VOLUME
CHANNEL
MULTI
MUTING
PIP
SUB-P
• ç‡ ‰ËÒÔΠÒÌËÁÛ ÓÚ ÏÂÌ˛ ÔÓ͇Á‡Ì˚ ÍÌÓÔÍË
ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl,
ÍÓÚÓ˚ÏË ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ‰Îfl
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ.
NEXT
PIP
POSITION
SWAP
FREEZE
STROBE
MENU/
OK
DISPLAY
2 Нажимая кнопки / и /
выберите название меню, а затем
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛.
SYSTEM
COLOUR SOUND
TV/TEXT
HOLD
MODE
REVEAL
SIZE
SUBPAGE
STORE
CANCEL
INDEX
Для возврата к предыдущему меню :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
Для мгновенного выхода из меню :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO.
TEXT
3 С помощью кнопок
функцию.
/
выберите
• ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ Ó ÙÛÌ͈Ëflı ‚
ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË Ì‡ ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı.
18
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
18
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
4 Для выбора настройки этой
функции используйте кнопки
/ .
• ÑÎfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËË,
Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ ÚÓθÍÓ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂÏ,
ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË Ì‡
ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı.
5 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения настройки.
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÂ‰‡˜ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ NTSC
ÏÂÌ˛ ËÏÂ˛Ú ‡ÁÏÂ ÔÓ ‚ÂÚË͇ÎË ‚‰‚ÓÂ
ÏÂ̸¯ËÈ ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó ‡ÁÏÂ‡ ÏÂÌ˛.
Использование кнопок
телевизора
ÑÎfl ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸
ÍÌÓÔÍË, Ô‰ÛÒÏÓÚÂÌÌ˚ ̇ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ
Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
кнопки
OK
кнопки
/
кнопки
/
MENU
OK
CHANEL
VOLUME
кнопки
TV/VIDEO
TV/VIDEO
EXIT
• ç‡ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂÚ
ÍÌÓÔÍË, Ëϲ˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË
DISPLAY ËÎË ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË.
19
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
19
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
åÂÌ˛ èÄêÄåÖíêõ
àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü
ЯРКО
üÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.
: ÚÂÏÌÂÂ
: Ò‚ÂÚÎÂÂ
ЧЕТКО
óÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.
: ÏÂ̸¯Â
: ·Óθ¯Â
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà
ÑÎfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl
Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸
Ó‰ÌÛ ËÁ ÚÂı èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.
ЯРКИЙ :
ì‚Â΢˂‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë flÍÓÒÚ¸.
СТАНДАРТ :
Ñ·ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
“Òڇ̉‡ÚÌ˚ÏË”.
МЯГКИЙ :
ëÏfl„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.
• ìÔ‡‚ÎÂÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà
ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ÓÒÛ˘ÂÒÚ‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÍÌÓÔÍË PICTURE MODE ̇ ÔÛθÚÂ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ PICTURE MODE” ̇ ÒÚ.
10.
ê„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
è‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ͇ʉÓÈ Ô‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÓËÁ‚ÓθÌÓ ËÁÏÂÌflÚ¸. ÇÌÂÒÂÌÌ˚Â
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÒÓı‡ÌflÚÒfl Ë ÒÚ‡ÌÛÚ
Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ‡ÏË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ Ô‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË.
КОНТРАСТ
äÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.
: ÏÂ̸¯Â
: ·Óθ¯Â
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl óÖíäé Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚ (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).
ЦВЕТ
ñ‚ÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.
: ·Î‰ÌÂÂ
: ÒÓ˜ÌÂÂ
ЦВ. ТОН
ñ‚ÂÚÓ‚ÓÈ ÚÓÌ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.
: Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È
: ÁÂÎÂÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È
• àÁÏÂÌÂÌË ԇ‡ÏÂÚ‡ ñÇ. íéç
‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓθÍÓ ÔË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC 3.58 ËÎË NTSC
4.43.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñÇ. íéç Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).
Для возврата к исходным параметрам
ПРЕДУСТАНОВКИ:
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ. Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚÂ
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ‚ ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‚ÂÌÛÚÒfl Í ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚Ï
Á̇˜ÂÌËflÏ, ÍÓÚÓ˚ ·Û‰ÛÚ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ˚ ͇Í
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.
ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé
ÑÎfl „ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË ·‡Î‡ÌÒ‡ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ
‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÅÄãÄçë
ÅÖãéÉé (Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÚÓÌÓ‚ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó). èÓÒÍÓθÍÛ
·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl Í‡Í ·‡ÁÓ‚˚È ‰Îfl ‚ÒÂı
ÓÒڇθÌ˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚, ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË ÂÊËχ ÅÄãÄçë
ÅÖãéÉé ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
̇ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ÒÂı ÓÒڇθÌ˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.
20
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
20
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ХОЛОД :
ÅÂÎ˚È Ò „ÓÎÛ·ËÁÌÓÈ. àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝ÚÓ„Ó
ÂÊËχ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ flÍËı
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl
·ÓΠÊË‚˚ı Ë flÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.
åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ
àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü
СРЕДНИЙ :
çÓχθÌ˚È ·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ.
ТЕПЛЫЙ :
ÅÂÎ˚È Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚Ï ÓÚÚÂÌÍÓÏ.
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ÔË
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÙËθÏÓ‚ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl ·ÓΠÔÓ‰ıÓ‰fl˘Ëı ‰Îfl ÙËθÏÓ‚
ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ
·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚ ÂÊËÏ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË” ËÎË ‚ ÂÊËÏ 16:9
ÙÛÌ͈ËË ZOOM (ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl χүڇ·‡
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl).
ñàîêéÇéâ
ùäéëÖçëéê
èË ‚˚·Ó ñàîêéÇéÉâ ùäéëÖçëéê
ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË „ÛÎËÛÂÚÒfl
‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò flÍÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÒ‚Â˘ÂÌËfl ‚
ÍÓÏ̇ÚÂ. ùÚÓ ÒÌËʇÂÚ Ì‡ÔflÊÂÌË „·Á Ë
ÔÓÚ·ÎflÂÏÛ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ
˝ÎÂÍÚÓ˝ÌÂ„˲.
ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò ÒÌËʇÂÚ
ÔÓÏÂıË, ËÒ͇ʇ˛˘Ë ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ
ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).
АВТО :
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË „ÛÎËÛÂÚ
ÛÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË
ÒÓ ÒÚÂÔÂ̸˛ ÔÓÏÂı Ë Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ Ì‡ËÎÛ˜¯ÂÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.
• ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍËÈ
ÛÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò,
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÏÓÊÂÚ ÒÚ‡Ú¸ ̘ÂÚÍËÏ.
êÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ
ÄÇíé.
МАКС :
ВКЛ :
чÌ̇fl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
чÌ̇fl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ДИСПЛЕЙ :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl. èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË flÍÓÒÚË ‚ ÍÓÏ̇Ú ̇ ÌÂÒÍÓθÍÓ
ÒÂÍÛ̉ ÔÓfl‚Îfl˛ÚÒfl Á̇˜ÍË ,
Ó·ÓÁ̇˜‡˛˘Ë flÍÓÒÚ¸. óÂÏ ÚÂÏÌ ‚
ÍÓÏ̇ÚÂ, ÚÂÏ ·Óθ¯Â ˜ËÒÎÓ Á̇˜ÍÓ‚.
ìÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl
̇ χÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË Ë ÔÓÒΠ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl
ÂÊËχ ÄÇíé ËϲÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË,
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åÄäë.
• ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ åÄäë Ì ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îfl
‚˚ÒÓÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.
МИН :
ìÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl
̇ ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÂÊËχ
ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÒÚ‡ÎÓ Ì‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ
˜ÂÚÍËÏ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åàç.
• ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ åàç Ì ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îfl
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.
21
LCT1218-001A-H_R/01-21
21
Black
4/9/02, 6:55 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
DigiPure
МИН :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl Digipure ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚ ÌÓ‚ÂÈ¯Û˛
ˆËÙÓ‚Û˛ ÚÂıÌÓÎӄ˲ ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. îÛÌ͈Ëfl
Digipure ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚ ‰‚ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË.
Функция Digipure :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÒÔÓÒÓ·ÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÒÓÁ‰‡Ì˲
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÔÛÚÂÏ
Û‰‡ÎÂÌËfl Î˯ÌËı Í‡Â‚˚ı ÁÓÌ
‚˚ÒÓÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı Ë ˜ÂÚÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÌËÁÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ
Í‡Â‚˚ ÁÓÌ˚ ‰Ó·‡‚Îfl˛ÚÒfl ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl
·ÓΠ˜ÂÚÍÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
îÛÌÍˆË˛ DigiPure ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ‚
ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé, åÄäë Ë åàç.
Функция компенс ации движения
изображения :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ·ÓΠÔ·‚ÌÛ˛ Ë
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÛ˛ ÔÂ‰‡˜Û ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ·˚ÒÚÓ
‰‚ËÊÛ˘ËıÒfl ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Ú‡ÍËı ͇Í
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÙÛÚ·ÓÎËÒÚÓ‚ Ë Ïfl˜‡.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl Digipure Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).
АВТО :
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÛÂÚ
ÛÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò ÛÓ‚ÌÂÏ
ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËÈ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ë Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ
̇ËÎÛ˜¯Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.
• èË ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍÓÏ ÛÓ‚Ì DigiPure Ë
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓÏ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË Ò
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓ„ÛÚ
¢ ·Óθ¯Â ÛÒËÎËÚ¸Òfl. êÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé.
ìÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl ̇
ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure ̇
ÄÇíé ËϲÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÂÂȉËÚ ̇ åàç.
• êÂÊËÏ åàç Ì ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‰Îfl
‚˚ÒÓÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ÒÓ
Ò··˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl DigiPure ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
PULL DOWN
ÇÍβ˜ÂÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË PULL DOWN
‰ÓÒÚË„‡ÂÚÒfl ·ÓΠ˜ÂÚÍÓÂ Ë ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ
¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌ˚ı ÍËÌÓÙËθÏÓ‚.
АВТО:
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇. Ç Ó·˚˜ÌÓÏ ÂÊËÏÂ
‡·ÓÚ˚ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰ÓÎÊ̇ ·˚Ú¸
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ Ì‡ ÄÇíé.
ВЫКЛ:
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇.
• Ñ‚ËÊÂÌË ӷ˙ÂÍÚÓ‚ ÏÓÊÂÚ Í‡Á‡Ú¸Òfl
ÌÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚Ï ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË
NTSC. óÚÓ·˚ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ¸ ·ÓΠÔ·‚ÌÓÂ
‰‚ËÊÂÌËÂ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ PULL
DOWN Ò ÄÇíé ̇ Çõäã.
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚
ÂÊËÏ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” Ë ‚
ÂÊËÏ “ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË”.
МАКС :
ìÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl ̇
χÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure ̇
ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÔÂ‰‡ÂÚÒfl Ì ÒÓ‚ÒÂÏ
ÔÓÎÌÓ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åÄäë.
• êÂÊËÏ åÄäë Ì ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.
22
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
22
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà
ëËÒÚÂχ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË. é‰Ì‡ÍÓ ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ
ÌÂflÒÌÓ ËÎË Ìˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.
1 Выберите СИСТЕМА
ЦВЕТНОСТИ и нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
2 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора режима ZOOM. Затем
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ‡Ò¯ËËÚÒfl, ‡ ̇Á‚‡ÌËÂ
‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ZOOM ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒfl ̇
˝Í‡Ì ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË ÓÍÓÎÓ 5 ÒÂÍÛ̉.
• àϲÚÒfl ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÂÊËÏ˚ :
çéêåÄãúçéÖ, ZOOM Ë 16:9. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“äÌÓÔ͇ ZOOM” ̇ ÒÚ. 9.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ZOOM Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).
2 С помощью кнопок /
выберите нужную систему
цветности. Затем нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ëàëíÖåA
ñÇÖíçéëíà ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 15.
• îÛÌ͈ËÂÈ ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà
ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛθڇ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.
ZOOM
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÙÓχڇ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl
ÍÓ˝ÙÙˈËÂÌÚ‡ ÔÓÔÓˆËÓ̇θÌÓÒÚË.
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÓÔÚËχθÌ˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.
PICTURE TILT
àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËflÌËfl χ„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎfl ÁÂÏÎË
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÂÂÍÓÒËÚ¸Òfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÊÌÓ ÓÚÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË.
1 Выберите PICTURE TILT и
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
2 Нажимайте кнопки / до тех
пор, пока перекос не
устранится. Затем нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
1 Выберите ZOOM и нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
23
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
23
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
åÂÌ˛
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà áÇìäÄ
БАЛАНС
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ·‡Î‡ÌÒ ÏÂÊ‰Û Î‚˚Ï
Ë Ô‡‚˚Ï „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎflÏË.
: Û‚Â΢ÂÌË „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Î‚ӄÓ
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎfl.
: Û‚Â΢ÂÌË „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Ô‡‚Ó„Ó
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎfl.
AI ìêéÇÖçú
ëíÖêÖé / I•II
èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ
üÁ˚Í I (Sub I) ËÎË üÁ˚Í II (Sub II). èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ
ÔËÂÏ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎflˆËË ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îfl
ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËfl ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚Û͇.
: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËfl
: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËfl
: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)
: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)
МОНО : éÚÏÂÌflÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ
ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ.
• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËfl Á‡‚ËÒflÚ
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËχı
ÇàÑÖé.
ê„ÛÎËӂ͇ Á‚Û͇
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÁ‚ÓθÌÓ„Ó
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl Á‚Û͇.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òfl
ÓÚ‰ÂθÌÓ ‰Îfl ÂÊËχ íÇ Ë ÂÊËχ
ÇàÑÖé.
ç‡ÔËÏÂ, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸  Çõäã ‚
ÂÊËÏ íÇ Ë Çäã ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.
ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ AI ìêéÇÖçú
ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ˜ÂÂÁ
Ô‡ÌÂθ ÇàÑÖé, ˝Ú‡ ÛÒÚ‡Ìӂ͇
Á‡„ËÒÚËÛÂÚÒfl Í‡Í Ì‡ÒÚÓÈ͇
ÂÊËχ ÇàÑÖé.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ Ì ‰‡‚‡Ú¸
ÌÛÊÌ˚ı ÂÁÛθڇÚÓ‚ ÔË Ó˜Â̸ ÌËÁÍÓÏ
ÛÓ‚ÌÂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl, ÔÂ‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó
ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ Òڇ̈ËÂÈ (ËÎË
Á‡‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌ˚Ï
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËÂÏ ‚ˉÂÓÒËÒÚÂÏ˚).
BBE
БАС
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÌËÊÌË ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚ Á‚Û͇.
: Ò··ÂÂ
: ÒËθÌÂÂ
ТЕМБР
24
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
Ô‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËfl ÂÁÍÓ„Ó Û‚Â΢ÂÌËfl ËÎË
ÛÏÂ̸¯ÂÌËfl ÛÓ‚Ìfl „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË ÔË
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ Ë ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËË
Ò Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ÇàÑÖé ̇ ‰Û„ÓÈ.
îÛÌÍˆË˛ ÇÇÖ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îfl
ÔÓÒÚÓ„Ó Ôˉ‡ÌËfl Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÏÛ
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌ˲ ı‡‡ÍÚÂËÒÚËÍ ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó,
ÌÂÒÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓ„Ó Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl.
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‚ÂıÌË ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚
Á‚Û͇.
: Ò··ÂÂ
: ÒËθÌÂÂ
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
24
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
1 Выберите НАУЩНИКИ и
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
Система BBE используется по лицензии
компании ВВE Sound, Inc. ВВЕ является
зарегистрированной торговой маркой
компании BBE Sound, inc.
SPATIALIZER
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ
ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound
(ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ‰‚Ûı ÂÊËÏÓ‚
SPATIALIZER.
• åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı
ÂÊËÏÓ‚ SPATIALIZER: LIVE, MOçO ËÎË
Çõäã.
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ SPATIALIZER” ̇ ÒÚ. 9.
Система SPATIALIZER изготовлена по
лицензии компании Desper Products,Inc.
ëìèÖê ÅÄë
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëÛÔÂ ŇÒ.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
2 С помощью кнопки /
сделайте выбор, а с помощью
кнопки / установите
функцию НАУЩНИКИ.
Нажмите кнопку OK, а затем
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
ГРОМКОСТЬ :
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl
„ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.
TV ГРОМКОГОВОР :
äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ì ‚˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒfl ‰‡Ê ÔË
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚. ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ‚˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒfl.
ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ì ‚˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒfl ‰‡Ê ÔË
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.
ÖÒÎË ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛,
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÚÒfl
ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.
ВЫХОД :
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
çÄìôçàäà
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËfl Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl
˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.
èË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ Á‚Û͇ ͇Í
éëçéÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÉãABH) ËÎË
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ
(BTOPOCTEè).
• á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
ÌÂθÁfl ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
• èË ‚˚‚Ӊ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì Ù‡„ÏÂÌÚ‡
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓθÍÓ
ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚‰ÂÌËÂ,
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËË ëíÖêÖé/I•II
·Û‰ÂÚ Ì‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚Ï.
25
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
25
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ
• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÌÂθÁfl
ÓÚÍβ˜ËÚ¸ ÒÂÚ‚Ó ÔËÚ‡ÌË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
• äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇, ÏÓÊÌÓ
‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛ íÄâåÖê ÇõäãûóÖçàü
‰Îfl ÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂʉÂÌËfl ËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl
ÓÒÚ‡‚¯Â„ÓÒfl ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.
ëàçàâ îéç
íÄâåÖê
ÇõäãûóÖçàü
åÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËÂ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ÓÔ‰ÂÎÂÌÌÓ ‚ÂÏfl.
1 Выберите ТАЙМЕР
ВЫКЛЮЧЕНИЯ и нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇ ÒËÌËÈ Ë
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl Á‚Û͇ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â Ò··Ó„Ó ËÎË
ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Â„Ó Ò˄̇·, ËÎË ÊÂ
‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË Ì ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ Ò˄̇ΠÒ
‚̯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ
2 С помощью кнопок /
установите период времени.
í‡ÈÏÂ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇˜ÌÂÚ ÓÚÒ˜ÂÚ
Á‡‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.
• åÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂËÓ‰ ‚ÂÏÂÌË
‰ÎËÚÂθÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ‰Ó 120 ÏËÌÛÚ (2 ˜‡Ò‡)
ÔË‡˘ÂÌËflÏË ÔÓ 10 ÏËÌÛÚ.
Для отмены этой функции:
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ‰Îfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË “Çõäã”.
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения установки.
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.
• ᇠӉÌÛ ÏËÌÛÚÛ ‰Ó ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸
“ëèéäéâçéâ çéóà!”.
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌËfl
ÔÂ‰ÌËı ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂ̇ ̇ Çäã, ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ
ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ ÚÓθÍÓ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔÛθڇ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.
àÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ‰Îfl
Ô‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËfl ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ
‰ÂÚ¸ÏË (·ÂÁ ‡Á¯ÂÌËfl Ó‰ËÚÂÎÂÈ).
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
àÑ çéåÖê
ÖÒÎË Ç˚ Ì ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ‰ÂÚË ÒÏÓÚÂÎË
ÓÔ‰ÂÎÂÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ‚˚ ÏÓÊÂÚÂ
Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.
ÖÒÎË ·ÂÌÓÍ ‚˚·ÂÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,
ÔËÒ‚ÓÂÌÌ˚È Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓÏÛ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ, ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë Ì‡ ÌÂÏ
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÒËÏ‚ÓÎ , Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ
ÌÂθÁfl ·Û‰ÂÚ ‚ˉÂÚ¸.
26
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
26
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
Как включить эту
функцию
1 Выберите ИД НОМЕР затем
нажмите кнопку 0 (AV).
Для просмотра
заблокированного
телеканала
1 Выберите номер программы с
заблокированным
телеканалом с помощью
кнопок с цифрами или списка
ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.
ùÍ‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
çéåÖê).
(àÑ
2 Установите ИД номер.
Для выбора номера:
̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍË / .
• ᇷÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌÂθÁfl
‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ / .
Для перемещения курсора:
̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍË / .
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
2 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для
вызова на экран “ИД НОМЕР”.
3 Введите ИД номер с помощью
кнопок с цифрами.
4 Нажимайте кнопки /
выбора телеканала.
для
• ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÔÓ„‡Ïχ, ÍÓÚÓ‡fl
‚ ̇ÒÚÓfl˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ Ú‡ÌÒÎËÛÂÚÒfl ÔÓ
‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÏÛ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ.
5 Нажмите синюю кнопку для
включения этой функции для
данного телеканала.
ÅÎÓÍËӂ͇ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÂ̇, Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ
ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸
Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.
Если Вы забыли ИД номер :
Ç˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ˝Ú‡Ô 1, ˜ÚÓ·˚ “ä‡Í ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸
˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”. èÓÒΠÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂʉÂÌËfl àÑ
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îfl
‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛.
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê
ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÌÓ‚‡ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ¸ ˝Ú‡Ô “ä‡Í
‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”.
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl
(àÑ çéåÖê) Ë ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î
·Û‰ÂÚ Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.
Для отмены этой функции :
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ.
(àÑ çéåÖê) ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ Ë ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î
·Û‰ÂÚ ‡Á·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.
6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения установки.
27
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
27
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË
‚¢‡ÌËfl, Ú.Â. ÂÒÎË ÓÌ Ì ÔËÌËχÂÚ Ò˄̇·
‚ Ú˜ÂÌË ÓÍÓÎÓ 15 ÏËÌÛÚ.
ВКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
ВЫКЛ :
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ ÌÂ
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ÓÚÍβ˜ÂÌËfl ÒÂÚ‚ӄÓ
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ ÌÂ
‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.
VIDEO-3
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ Ô‡‚ËθÌÛ˛
̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ VIDEO-3, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛
ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘ÂÏÛ ÓÚ ‚̯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡,
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3, ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÛ. èË
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓÈ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÌÂ
·Û‰ÂÚ.
ВИДЕО :
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÌÓχθÌ˚È
(ÔÓÎÌ˚È) ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î.
КОМПОНЕНТHЫЙ :
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Π(Y/CB/CR).
• èÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÔÓ
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËflÏ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ” ̇
ÒÚ. 36.
• чÌÌ˚È ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚
525P) ÚÓθÍÓ ÔË ÔÓ‰‡˜Â ̇ ‚ıÓ‰
ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·.
28
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
28
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
åÂÌ˛ HÄCTPéâäà
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ.
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
üáõä
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ flÁ˚Í ÏÂÌ˛ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇
flÁ˚ÍÓ‚.
2 После сохранения
телеканалов в списке номеров
программ появится меню
НАСТРОЙКА.
1 Выберите ЯЗЫК и нажмите
кнопку MENU/OK.
OK
TV
DISP
2 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора языка.
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения установки.
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.
ÄÇíé èêéÉ.
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓÈ
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Û‚ÂÂÌÌÓ ÔËÌËχÂÏ˚ı
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ. ÑÎfl
˝ÚÓ„Ó ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ.
1 Выберите АВТО ПРОГ. и
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
ÇÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ.
èËÌËχÂÏ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ·Û‰ÛÚ
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸Òfl ‚ ÒÔËÒÍÂ
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.
• èÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ ‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË
çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ ·˚Î
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ,
Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ. Ì ÒÓı‡ÌflÂÚ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ̇ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0
(AV).
• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ÌÂ
ÌÛÊ̇, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK ‰Îfl
‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.
29
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
29
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
çÄëíêéâäÄ/
Çêìóçìû
îÛÌ͈ËË çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‰ÂÎflÚÒfl ̇
‰‚‡ ÚËÔ‡:
‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌË ÚÂÍÛ˘Ëı ÌÓÏÂÓ‚
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ) Ë ۘ̇fl
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ‚ ÒÔËÒÓÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl êìóçÄü).
ВНИМАНИЕ
ИД :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl „ËÒÚËÛÂÚ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· (àÑ).
ВСТАВКА :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰Ó·‡‚ÎflÂÚ ÌÓ‚˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÍ
ÚÂÍÛ˘ÂÏÛ ÒÔËÒÍÛ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÛÚÂÏ
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC.
УДАЛИТЬ :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Û‰‡ÎflÂÚ ÌÂÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.
• Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ
ìèêÄÇã, ìÑÄãàíú ËÎË ÇëíÄÇäÄ
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ÔÂÂÁ‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌË ÚÂÍÛ˘Â„Ó
ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.
Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ
ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ËÁÏÂÌflÚÒfl.
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π·˚Î Á‡ÔÂÚ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·
ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ÓÚÏÂÌ ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê.
• ÖÒÎË ‰Îfl ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ èê 99
ÛÊ ̇Á̇˜ÂÌ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ÇëíÄÇäÄ Ô˂‰ÂÚ Í ÒÚË‡Ì˲ ˝ÚÓ„Ó
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.
1 Выберите НАСТРОЙКА/
ВРУЧНУЮ и нажмите кнопку
MENU/OK.
2 Используйте функцию
согласно ее описанию.
УПРАВЛ :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.
РУЧНАЯ :
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ Û˜ÌÛ˛
„ËÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÓ‚Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÔÓ‰
ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения настройки.
• ÑÎfl ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ êR 0 ‚
ÒÔËÒÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl “AV”.
ФУНКЦИИ
УПРАВЛ
1 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора телеканала.
2 Нажмите кнопку для
включения функции УПРАВЛ.
3 С помощью кнопок /
выберите новый номер
программы.
Для отмены функции УПРАВЛ :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
30
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
30
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
4 Нажмите кнопку для
изменения номера программы
телеканала.
ИД
1 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора телеканала.
2 Нажмите красную кнопку для
включения функции ИД.
3 Введите название телеканала
(ИД).
Пользуйтесь кнопками /
для выбора знаков.
Пользуйтесь кнопками /
для перемещения курсора.
РУЧНАЯ
1 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора номера программы,
под которым Вы хотите
зарегистрировать новый
телеканал.
2 Нажмите синюю кнопку для
включения функции РУЧНАЯ.
ë Ô‡‚ÓÈ ÒÚÓÓÌ˚ ÓÚ ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ëàëíÖåÄ (ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl) ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.
Для отмены функции РУЧНАЯ :
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
Для отмены функции ИД:
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
4 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для регистрации названия
телеканала.
УДАЛИТЬ
1 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора телеканала.
2 Нажмите желтую кнопку для
удаления телеканала.
ä‡Ì‡Î ·Û‰ÂÚ Û‰‡ÎÂÌ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.
3 Нажимайте кнопку для
выбора телевещательной
системы (системы звукового
сопровождения) для
регистрируемого телеканала.
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‰Îfl
‡Á΢Ì˚ı „ËÓÌÓ‚ Ë ÒÚ‡Ì Ô˂‰ÂÌ˚
‚ Ú‡·Îˈ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ
ëàëíÖåõ” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.
4 Нажмите зеленую или красную
кнопку для поиска
телеканала.
ë͇ÌËÓ‚‡ÌË ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl, ÍÓ„‰‡
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π·Û‰ÂÚ Ì‡È‰ÂÌ. ùÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ.
31
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
31
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
5 Нажимайте зеленую или
красную кнопку до тех пор,
пока не появится нужный
телеканал.
При плохом приеме телеканала :
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒËÌÂÈ ËÎË ÊÂÎÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË
‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ÚÓÌÍÛ˛ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ Ì‡ ˝ÚÓÚ
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.
Если не удается получить нормальное
звуковое сопровождение даже при
нормальном изображении :
ùÚÓ Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡ ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÛ˛
̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ ëàëíÖåA. ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ
Ë ‚˚·ÂËÚ ëàëíÖåA Ò ÌÓχθÌ˚Ï
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚˚Ï ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂÏ.
6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для регистрации телеканала
под номером программы.
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.
3 С помощью кнопок /
выберите “CC” или “CH”
согласно номеру CH/CC
телеканала.
Для отмены функции ВСТАВКА :
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.
4 С помощью кнопок с цифрами
введите оставшийся номер CH/
CC.
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË. èÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.
• çÓÏÂ CH/CC Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚÛ, ̇
ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ‚‰ÂÚÒfl ÚÂ΂¢‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó·Ì‡ÛÊËÚ¸
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚÂ
ÚÂ΂¢‡ÌËfl, Ó·ÓÁ̇˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ
CH/CC, ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Á‡ÒÚ‡‚͇, Û͇Á˚‚‡˛˘‡fl
̇ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Ë Ò˄̇·.
ВСТАВКА
ПОДГОТОВКА
• ç‡È‰ËÚ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÌÓÏÂÛ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·, ‚
Ú‡·Î. ̇ ÒÚ. 33.
1 Нажимайте кнопки / для
выбора номера программы,
под которым регистрируется
новый телеканал.
2 Нажмите зеленую кнопку для
включения функции ВСТАВКА.
32
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
32
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
Номер CH/CC
ÖÒÎË Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇëíÄÇäÄ, ÓÔËÒ‡Ì̇fl ̇ ÒÚ. 32, ̇ȉËÚ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ, ÔÓ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ Ú‡·ÎˈÂ.
US: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ëòÄ, ̇ îËÎËÔÔË̇ı Ë Ú.‰.
CCIR: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ̇ ÅÎËÊÌÂÏ ÇÓÒÚÓÍÂ, ‚ û„Ó-ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ ÄÁËË Ë Ú.‰.
OIRT: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ Ö‚ÓÔÂ, êÓÒÒËË, ǸÂÚ̇ÏÂ Ë Ú.‰.
AUSTRALIA: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ Ä‚ÒÚ‡ÎËË Ë Ú.‰.
ä‡Ì‡Î
CH
CH 02
CH 03
CH 04
CH 05
CH 06
CH 07
CH 08
CH 09
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16
CH 17
CH 18
CH 19
CH 20
CH 21
CH 22
CH 23
CH 24
CH 25
CH 26
CH 27
CH 28
CH 29
CH 30
CH 31
CH 32
CH 33
CH 34
CH 35
CH 36
CH 37
CH 38
CH 39
CH 40
CH 41
CH 42
CH 43
CH 44
CH 45
CH 46
CH 47
CH 48
CH 49
CH 50
CH 51
CH 52
CH 53
CH 54
CH 55
CH 56
CH 57
CH 58
CH 59
CH 60
CH 61
CH 62
CH 63
CH 64
CH 65
CH 66
CH 67
CH 68
CH 69
CH 70
US
US-2
US-3
US-4
US-5
US-6
US-7
US-8
US-9
US-10
US-11
US-12
US-13
US-14
US-15
US-16
US-17
US-18
US-19
US-20
US-21
US-22
US-23
US-24
US-25
US-26
US-27
US-28
US-29
US-30
US-31
US-32
US-33
US-34
US-35
US-36
US-37
US-38
US-39
US-40
US-41
US-42
US-43
US-44
US-45
US-46
US-47
US-48
US-49
US-50
US-51
US-52
US-53
US-54
US-55
US-56
US-57
US-58
US-59
US-60
US-61
US-62
US-63
US-64
US-65
US-66
US-67
US-68
US-69
CCIR
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
ä‡Ì‡Î
OIRT
R1
R2
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
E67
E68
E69
AUSTRALIA
AU-0
AU-1
AU-2
AU-6
AU-7
AU-8
AU-9
AU-10
AU-11
CC
CC 01
CC 02
CC 03
CC 04
CC 05
CC 06
CC 07
CC 08
CC 09
CC 10
CC 11
CC 12
CC 13
CC 14
CC 15
CC 16
CC 17
CC 18
CC 19
CC 20
CC 21
CC 22
CC 23
CC 24
CC 25
CC 26
CC 27
CC 28
CC 29
CC 30
CC 31
CC 32
CC 33
CC 34
CC 35
CC 36
CC 37
CC 38
CC 39
CC 40
CC 41
CC 42
CC 43
CC 44
CC 45
CC 46
CC 47
CC 48
CC 49
CC 50
CC 51
CC 52
CC 53
CC 54
CC 55
CC 56
CC 57
CC 58
CC 59
CC 60
CC 61
CC 62
CC 63
CC 64
CC 75
CC 76
CC 77
CC 78
CC 79
CC 95
CC 96
CC 97
CC 98
CC 99
US
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1
W+2
W+3
W+4
W+5
W+6
W+7
W+8
W+9
W+10
W+11
W+12
W+13
W+14
W+15
W+16
W+17
W+18
W+19
W+20
W+21
W+22
W+23
W+24
W+25
W+26
W+27
W+28
CCIR
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
S-11
S-12
S-13
S-14
S-15
S-16
S-17
S-18
S-19
S-20
S-21
S-22
S-23
S-24
S-25
S-26
S-27
S-28
S-29
S-30
S-31
S-32
S-33
S-34
S-35
S-36
S-37
S-38
S-39
S-40
S-41
X
Y
Z
Z+1
Z+2
OIRT
AUSTRALIA
AU-5
AU-5A
R3
R4
R5
AU-3
AU-4
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
33
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
33
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ
àÏÂÂÚÒfl 4 „ÛÔÔ˚ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡. Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ
„ÛÔÔÛ, ÍÓÚÓ‡fl ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ flÁ˚ÍÛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ÍÓÚÓÛ˛ ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸.
1 Выберите ЯЗЫК ТЕЛЕТЕКСТА
и нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.
2 Нажмите кнопки
выбора группы.
Группа
/
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения настройки.
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ „ÛÔÔ˚ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚, ‚
ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÌÂÚ flÁ˚͇ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ
ÌÓχθÌÓ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡Ú¸Òfl.
для
Языки
Турецкий, венгерский,
английский, немецкий,
французский, итальянский,
ГPУППА-1
испанский, португальский,
греческий, шведский,
финский
Польский, сербский,
хорватский, словенский,
чешский, словацкий,
ГPУППА-2 румынский, венгерский,
немецкий, французский,
итальянский, шведский,
финский
Русский, болгарский,
латышский, литовский,
эстонский, украинский,
ГPУППА-3 сербский, хорватский,
словенский, чешский,
словацкий, английский,
немецкий
34
Арабский, чешский,
словацкий, венгерский,
английский, немецкий,
ГPУППА-4 французский,
итальянский, испанский,
португальский, шведский,
финский
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
34
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
åÂÌ˛ ÑÖåé
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÑÖåé Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÛ˛ ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı
ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
Когда функция ДЕМО
установлена на ВКЛ :
ÔË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
̇˜Ë̇ÂÚÒfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒ͇fl ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl.
ÖÒÎË ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl Ì Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl,
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÑÖåé ̇ Çõäã.
1 Нажмите кнопку
выбора ВКЛ.
/
для
ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÑÖåé ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ
Çõäã.
2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK
для завершения настройки.
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÑÖåé ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl, ‚
ÂÁÛθڇÚ ̇˜ÌÂÚÒfl ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl.
Для отмены демонстрации:
̇ÊÏËÚ β·Û˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔÛθڇ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.
35
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
35
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ПОДГОТОВКА
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ
‚̯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÈÚÂ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ ‚̯ÌËÂ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÈ
ÒıÂÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl.
Перед выполнением любого
подсоединения :
• èÓ˜ÚËÚ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó Í ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÏ˚Ï
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï. ëÔÓÒÓ· ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl
Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ ÍÓÌÍÂÚÌ˚ı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ Ë ÏÓÊÂÚ
·˚Ú¸ ÓÚ΢Ì˚Ï ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡, ÔÓ͇Á‡ÌÌÓ„Ó
̇ ÒıÂÏÂ. äÓÏ ÚÓ„Ó, ‰Îfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËfl
ÌÓχθÌÓÈ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÚ·ӂ‡Ú¸Òfl
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ ‚
Á‡‚ËÒËÏÓÒÚË ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡ ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl.
• Ç˚Íβ˜ËÚ ‚Ò ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒÎÂ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.
• Ç ‡Á‰ÂΠ“íÂıÌ˘ÂÒÍË ‰‡ÌÌ˚” ̇ ÒÚ.
43 ÒÓ‰ÂÊËÚÒfl ËÌÙÓχˆËfl Ó Ô‡ÌÂÎflı
ÇàÑÖé. Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, Ì ‚Íβ˜ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ‚
Ô˂‰ÂÌÌ˚È ÌËÊ ÒÔËÒÓÍ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸
Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “íÂıÌ˘ÂÒÍË ‰‡ÌÌ˚” ‰Îfl
‚˚·Ó‡ ̇˷ÓΠÔÓ‰ıÓ‰fl˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË
ÇàÑÖé.
• àÏÂÈÚ ‚‚ˉÛ, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚÂθÌ˚Â
͇·ÂÎË Ì ‚ıÓ‰flÚ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË.
• èË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK,
Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚, ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU
LINK” ̇ ÒÚ. 38.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
36
Çå (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)
Çå (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)
Çå ‰Îfl Á‡ÔËÒË (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚Â
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚; Y/CB/CR)
íÇ-Ë„‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)
íÇ-Ë„‡ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)
ÇˉÂÓ͇ÏÂ‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)
ÇˉÂÓ͇ÏÂ‡ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)
ÉÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚
A 䇷Âθ AV COMPU LINK
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
36
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ
Способы подсоединения
1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO
телевизора с гнездом VIDEO
OUT (видеовыход) устройства
с помощью видеокабеля.
Подсоединение устройства к
телевизору с помощью кабеля
S-VIDEO :
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT (‚˚ıÓ‰ SVIDEO) ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ò ‡Á˙ÂÏÓÏ “S”
(S-VIDEO) ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl SVIDEO, ‡ Ì ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
àÏÂÈÚ ‚‚ˉÛ, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÂÒÎË
ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå Ò ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ Í‡Í Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl, Ú‡Í Ë Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
͇·ÂÎfl S-VIDEO.
Соединение DVD-плеера с
телевизором с помощью
компонентного видеокабеля :
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ÚË „ÌÂÁ‰‡ (Y/VIDEO, CB Ë CR)
Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3 Ë COMPONENT (ÔÓÎÌ˚È
‚ˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) „ÌÂÁ‰‡ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ ÌÂ
Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ VIDEO-3 ̇
äéåèéçÖçíçõâ Òӄ·ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ
“VIDEO-3” ̇ ÒÚ. 28.
• чÌÌ˚È ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ (Ò˄̇ÎÓÏ
525P). (ÂÒÎË Ì‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚÒfl
ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ˚È ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î).
ÖÒÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚ Progressive
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚ (Ò˄̇Î˚ 525P) ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â
ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚,
ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ
ÔÓÒ‰ÒÚ‚ÓÏ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎËÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸
Á‡ÔËÒ¸ ̇ ‰ËÒÍË DVD ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â
ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
Подсоединение устройства
через панель VIDEO-3/COMPONENT с помощью видеокабеля :
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó Y/VIDEO ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ë
„ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO OUT (‚ˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ Ì ӉÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ VIDEO-3 ̇ ÇàÑÖé
Òӄ·ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “VIDEO-3” ̇ ÒÚ. 28.
• ç‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-4 „ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO
Ó·ÓÁ̇˜ÂÌÓ Í‡Í “V”.
2 Соединение аудиогнезд AUDIO
(L/MONO и R) телевизора и
гнезд AUDIO OUT (аудиовыход
L/R) с помощью аудиокабелей.
Если звуковой сигнал
устройства является
монофоническим :
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO OUT ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò
„ÌÂÁ‰ÓÏ L/MONO ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
‡Û‰ËÓ͇·ÂÎfl.
Подсоединение устройств
к панели OUTPUT
ë˄̇Î˚ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚ı ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‚˚ıÓ‰flÚ ËÁ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT. èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌË‚ Çå Í
Ô‡ÌÂÎË OUTPUT, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡Ú¸
ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚ ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ.
ÑÎfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT Òӄ·ÒÌÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ.
1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO
панели OUTPUT с гнездом
VIDEO IN (видеовход)
видеомагнитофона при
помощи видеокабеля.
37
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
37
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ
2 Соедините гнезда AUDIO (L и
R) панели OUTPUT с гнездами
AUDIO IN (аудиовход L/R)
видеомагнитофона при
помощи аудиокабеля.
• èË ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ÔÂÍ‡˘‡˛ÚÒfl Ò˄̇Î˚ ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ
OUTPUT.
• äÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ Ò˄̇Î˚, ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘ËÂ
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3/ CéåPéNENT,
ÌÂθÁfl ‚˚‚ÂÒÚË ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT.
Подсоединение головных
телефонов
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚ ÒÓ
ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ ÏËÌ˯ÚÂÍÂÓÏ
(‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ) Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ̇ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı
AV COMPU LINK
ëËÒÚÂχ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV
COMPU LINK Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓÂ
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌË ÌÂÒÍÓθÍËÏË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ÏË ÔË
‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÚÓθÍÓ Ó‰ÌËÏ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ.
èËÏÂÌËÚÂθÌÓ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ, ‚ ÂÁÛθڇÚÂ
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ‚̯ÌËÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ ·Û‰ÂÚ
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËÂ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ. ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡
ÏËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÇàÑÖé ÌÂ
Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÔÛθڇ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.
Примеры работы системы
дистанционного
управления AV COMPU
LINK
ç‡ÊËχfl ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PLAY ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇
ËÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡Ú¸
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ‚̯ÌÂÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Â.
ÖÒÎË Á‡„ÛÁËÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ‡ÌÌÛ˛ ÔÎÂÌÍÛ (̇
͇ÒÒÂÚÂ Ò Û‰‡ÎÂÌÌ˚Ï Á‡˘ËÚÌ˚Ï flÁ˚˜ÍÓÏ) ‚
Çå, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ¸.
ÇÍβ˜‡Ú¸ Ë ‚˚Íβ˜‡Ú¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ
(̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl) Ë
ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ˚ ÇàÑÖé ÏÓÊÌÓ Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔËÂÏÌË͇ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÄV.
• ꇷÓÚ‡ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU LINK Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡. ëÏ.
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.
• èË ‚˚·Ó “áÇìäéÇéÉé
ëéèêéÇéÜÑÖçàü íÇ” ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â
‚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
ÔËÂÏÌË͇ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV ÏÓÊÂÚ
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË Ò‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl
ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, Ú‡Í
˜ÚÓ Á‚Û˜‡ÌË ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â
Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ VOLUME-/+ ËÎË
MUTING ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÓÚÏÂÌËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛
ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ. Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚÂ
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Á‡Á‚Û˜‡Ú
ÒÌÓ‚‡.
Условия, при которых
можно использовать
систему дистанционного
управления AV COMPU
LINK
• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, Ëϲ˘ÂÂ
‡Á˙ÂÏ AV COMPU LINK.
38
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
38
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ
• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ë
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl AV
COMPU LINK.
䇷Âθ AV COMPU LINK Ì ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚
ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË
͇·ÂÎfl AV COMPU LINK ÌÂÚ, ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚÂ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ë ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛
͇·ÂÎfl, ̇ Ó·ÓËı ÍÓ̈‡ı ÍÓÚÓÓ„Ó
ËϲÚÒfl 3,5 ÏÏ (ÏÓÌÓ) ¯ÚÂÍÂ˚.
• ìÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Í
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé Ë
Ô‡‚ËθÌÓ Ì‡ÒÚÓËÚ¸, Ë̇˜Â ÒËÒÚÂχ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU
LINK Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸. ÅÓÎÂÂ
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU LINK”.
• íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‰ÓÎÊÂÌ Ì‡ıÓ‰ËÚ¸Òfl ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ
ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl (Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER
‰ÓÎÊÂÌ „ÓÂÚ¸ Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï). ÖÒÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÓÚÍβ˜ÂÌ ÓÚ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl (Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ì „ÓËÚ), ÒËÒÚÂχ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU
LINK ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.
Настройка системы
дистанционного
управления AV COMPU LINK
ВНИМАНИЕ :
• ëÔÓÒÓ·˚ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÓÚ΢‡˛ÚÒfl ÓÚ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌÌÓ„Ó
ÌËÊ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡. èÂ‰ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËÂÏ
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË Ó·flÁ‡ÚÂθÌÓ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Û.
1 Подсоедините устройство к
панели VIDEO-1 или VIDEO-2
телевизора.
При подсоединении DVDплеера к телевизору с
помощью компонентного
видеокабеля :
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ Í Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
• èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌ˲ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ‚̯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚” ̇
ÒÚ. 36.
2 Соедините гнездо AV COMPU
LINK телевизора с гнездом AV
COMPU LINK устройства с
помощью кабеля AV COMPU
LINK.
3 Измените настройку
устройства в соответствии с
панелью VIDEO, с которой оно
соединено.
Если ВМ соединен с панелью
VIDEO-1 :
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ ̇ A.
Если DVD-плеер соединен с
панелью VIDEO-1 :
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVDÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD2.
Если ВМ соединен с панелью
VIDEO-2 :
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ ̇ B.
Если DVD-плеер соединен с
панелью VIDEO-2 :
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVDÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD3.
Если DVD-плеер соединен с
панелью VIDEO-3 с помощью
компонентного видеокабеля :
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVDÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD1.
• àÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÒÏ. ‚ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ı ÔÓ
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.
• ÖÒÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÏÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó ÌÂ
ËÏÂÂÚ ÌË ÍÓ‰‡ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl, ÌË ÂÊËχ AV COMPULINK,
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚÂ Â„Ó ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-1.
39
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
39
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
Устранение неисправностей
ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ ‚ÓÁÌË͇ÂÚ ÔÓ·ÎÂχ, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ” ÔÂ‰ ÚÂÏ Í‡Í Ó·‡˘‡Ú¸Òfl Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. ùÚ‡ ËÌÙÓχˆËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÏÓ˜¸ Ç‡Ï ‚
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËË ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ·ÂÁ ÔÓÒÚÓÓÌÌÂÈ ÔÓÏÓ˘Ë. ÖÒÎË, ̇ÔËÏÂ, ‚ËÎ͇ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl
‚˚ÒÍӘ˷ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË ËÎË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚̇ ‡ÌÚÂÌ̇, ÏÓÊÂÚ ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ¸ ‚Ô˜‡ÚÎÂÌËÂ, ˜ÚÓ
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.
Внимание :
• Ç ‰‡ÌÌÓÏ ‡Á‰ÂΠ‡ÒÒχÚË‚‡˛ÚÒfl ÚÓθÍÓ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚, ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍË ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌÂӘ‚ˉÌ˚.
ÖÒÎË Û Ç‡Ò ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ÔÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ì˲ ͇ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ Ò̇˜‡Î‡
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ‡Á‰ÂÎ ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡, ‡ Ì ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”.
• ÖÒÎË ÌË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÂÍÓÏẨ‡ˆËÈ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”, ÌË Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËfl ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ Ì ۉ‡ÎÓÒ¸, ‚˚̸ÚÂ
‚ËÎÍÛ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË Ë Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. ç Ô˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸
ÓÚÂÏÓÌÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ò‡ÏÓÒÚÓflÚÂθÌÓ, Ì ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÈÚ Á‡‰Ì˛˛ Í˚¯ÍÛ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÌÂ
‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl
• ÇÒÚ‡‚ÎÂ̇ ̇ ÎË ‚ËÎ͇ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ‚
ÓÁÂÚÍÛ?
• ÉÓËÚ ÎË Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER?
ÖÒÎË ÓÌ Ì „ÓËÚ, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ
‚˚Íβ˜‡ÚÂÎfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.
çÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl/
çÂÚ Á‚Û͇
• ç fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÎË Ò˄̇Π‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ Ò··˚Ï? Ç ˝ÚÓÏ
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â Ò‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ëàçàâ
îéç – ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ, Á‚ÛÍ
ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl. ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ‚Ò Ê ıÓÚËÚÂ
ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ
ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËË “ëàçàâ îéç” Ì‡
ÒÚ. 26 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ
ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ̇ Çõäã.
• è‡‚ËθÌ˚ ÎË Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰Îfl ëàëíÖåõ
áÇìäÄ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·? èÓ˜ÚËÚÂ
ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË “äÌÓÔ͇ SOUND SYSTEM” ̇
ÒÚ. 12 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸
ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ.
èÎÓıÓ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl
• ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ·ÎÓÍËÛ˛Ú
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÒÌ„) Ô˘Ë̇ ÏÓÊÂÚ
Á‡Íβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl ‚ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÏ Í‡·ÂΠËÎË
‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ. èÓ‚Â¸Ú ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ:
è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂ̇
‡ÌÚÂÌ̇ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ?
ç ÔÓ‚ÂʉÂÌ ÎË Í‡·Âθ?
è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓËÂÌÚËÓ‚‡Ì‡
‡ÌÚÂÌ̇?
àÒÔ‡‚̇ ÎË Ò‡Ï‡ ‡ÌÚÂÌ̇?
• ÖÒÎË ‚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ËÎË ‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ
̇‚Ó‰flÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ ‰Û„Ëı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,
̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÏÓ„ÛÚ ÔÓfl‚ËÚ¸Òfl ÔÓÎÓÒ˚ ËÎË
‰Û„Ë ÔÓÏÂıË. 쉇ÎËÚ ڇÍËÂ
ÔÓÏÂıÓ„ÂÌÂËÛ˛˘Ë ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ ͇Í
ÛÒËÎËÚÂÎË, ÍÓÏÔ¸˛ÚÂ˚, ÙÂÌ˚, ÓÚ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ËÎË ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ ‰Û„ÓÏ ÏÂÒÚÂ. ÖÒÎË ‚
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ ̇‚Ó‰flÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ
‡‰ËÓχ˜Ú˚ ËÎË ‚˚ÒÓÍÓ‚ÓθÚÌ˚ı ÎËÌËÈ,
Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ.
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÔËÌËχÂÚ Ò˄̇Î,
ÓÚ‡ÊÂÌÌ˚È ÓÚ „Ó ËÎË Á‰‡ÌËÈ,
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ‰‚ÓËÚ¸Òfl.
èÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ËÁÏÂÌËÚ¸ ÓËÂÌÚ‡ˆË˛
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ËÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸  ÌÓ‚ÓÈ,
ӷ·‰‡˛˘ÂÈ ÎÛ˜¯ÂÈ Ì‡Ô‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÒÚ¸˛.
40
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
40
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ
• Ñ·ÈÚ ÎË ‚˚ ÔÓÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ ëàëíÖåÄ
ñÇÖíçéëíà ‰Îfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·
Ô‡‚ËθÌÓ?ÑÎfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËfl ˝ÚÓÈ
ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇
ÒÚ. 11.
• è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ñÇÖí Ë
üêäé? ÑÎfl „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚÂ
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ê„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 20.
• á‡ÔËÒ¸ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ Çå ÌÂ
ÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl, Ú.Í. ÓÌ ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡ÔËÒ‡Ú¸Òfl
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓ.
• üÍË ·ÂÎ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (̇ÔËÏÂ,
·ÂÎÓ Ô·ڸÂ) ÏÓ„ÛÚ ‚˚„Îfl‰ÂÚ¸ ̇
˝Í‡ÌÂ Í‡Í ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚Â.
ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓ ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËÂ,
Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÓÒÓ·ÂÌÌÓÒÚflÏË ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡,
ÓÌÓ Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛.
çÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚ‡ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ ÔË
ÛıÓ‰Â Ò ˝Í‡Ì‡ flÍÓ„Ó ·ÂÎÓ„Ó
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı Ëϲ˘ËıÒfl ‚
ÔÓ‰‡Ê ԇÍÂÚÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌÓ„Ó
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËfl ‰Îfl ‚ˉÂÓ ËÎË
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓ Ò‰Â·ÌÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓÁ‡ÔËÒÂÈ
‚ÂıÌflfl ˜‡ÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ
ËÏÂÚ¸ ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËfl.
ùÚÓ Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÓ Ò ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ, ‡ Ì Ò
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.
èÎÓıÓ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó
Á‚Û͇
• è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ÅÄë Ë
íÖåÅê? ÖÒÎË ÌÂÚ, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ
„ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË, ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“ê„ÛÎËӂ͇ Á‚Û͇” ̇ ÒÚ. 24.
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÏÓ„ÛÚ
‚ÓÁÌË͇ڸ ÚÛ‰ÌÓÒÚË Ò ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËÂÏ
ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó ËÎË ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜ÌÓ„Ó
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚
‡Á‰ÂΠ“CTEPEO / I • II” ̇ ÒÚ. 24,
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ ̇ ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓÂ
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ.
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ÌÂ
‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ
• ç ÔÓ‡ ÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË ‚ ÔÛθÚÂ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl?
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÌÓ‚˚ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË Òӄ·ÒÌÓ
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ìÒÚ‡Ìӂ͇
·‡Ú‡ÂÂÍ ‚ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 4.
• ç Ô˚Ú‡ÂÚÂÒ¸ ÎË Ç˚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÔÛθÚ
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl,
̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ÒÁ‡‰Ë ËÎË Ò·ÓÍÛ ËÎË Ì‡
‡ÒÒÚÓflÌËË ·ÓΠ7 Ï ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡?
ê‡ÒÔÓÎÓÊËÚ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÒÔÂÂ‰Ë ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, ̇
‡ÒÒÚÓflÌËË Ì ·ÓΠ7 Ï ÓÚ Ì„Ó.
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡
ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÌÂθÁfl. ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îfl ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËfl Ò
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ Ó·˚˜ÌÛ˛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÛ Ë
ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛.
• ç ‚Íβ˜ÂÌ ÎË áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ? ÖÒÎË
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂ̇
̇ Çäã, ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÔÂ‰ÌËÏË
ÍÌÓÔ͇ÏË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂθÁfl.
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ ̇ Çõäã,
ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖ┠̇ ÒÚ. 26.
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ÔÂÂÒÚ‡ÂÚ
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚ ÔËÚ‡ÌË ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl. á‡ÚÂÏ Â˘Â ‡Á ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ
‰Îfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl. ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ
̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓχθÌÓ
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.
• èË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÌÂ
‡·ÓÚ‡˛Ú;
èÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl:
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE Ë ÍÌÓÔ͇
STROÇE.
îÛÌ͈ËË åÖçû:
óÖíäé, ñÇ. íéç, ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò,
Digipure Ë ZOOM.
41
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
41
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ
ÑÛ„ËÂ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚
• èË ‚Íβ˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË íÄâåÖê
ÇõäãûóÖçàü ËÎË ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓÂ
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ‚˚Íβ˜ËÎÒfl,
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ‰Îfl „Ó
‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl. ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ
ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.
• èË ÔËÍÓÒÌÓ‚ÂÌËË Í ˝Í‡ÌÛ
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó˘Û˘‡Ú¸Òfl ΄ÍËÈ
˝ÎÂÍÚ˘ÂÒÍËÈ ‡Áfl‰ ÒÚ‡Ú˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó
˝ÎÂÍÚ˘ÂÒÚ‚‡. ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓÂ
fl‚ÎÂÌËÂ, Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ
ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡, ÓÌÓ Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. í‡ÍÓÈ ÒÚ‡Ú˘ÂÒÍËÈ
‡Áfl‰ Ì Ô˘ËÌflÂÚ ‚‰‡ Ó„‡ÌËÁÏÛ
˜ÂÎÓ‚Â͇.
• ÖÒÎË ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ÔË ÔÓ‰Íβ˜ÂÌËË
̇ۯÌËÍÓ‚ Á‚ÛÍ ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ
íÇ Ì ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡Î, ËÁÏÂÌËÚ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ TV
ÉêéåäéÉéÇéê. ‚ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄìôçàäà ̇
Çõäã. èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ҂‰ÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰
Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.
• ÖÒÎË ‚·ÎËÁË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ó͇ÊÂÚÒfl
χ„ÌËÚÌÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, Ú‡ÍÓ ͇Í
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂθ, ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË
ËÒ͇ÊÂÌË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ËÎË ‚ ۄ·ı
˝Í‡Ì‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËÂ
ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚. 쉇ÎËÚ χ„ÌËÚÌÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ‚ÓÁÌË͇˛Ú
ÓÚ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ, ÔÂÂȉËÚ ̇
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝Í‡ÌËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚ı
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ.
• àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËflÌËfl χ„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎfl áÂÏÎË
ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ÔÂÂÍÓÒ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. ÑÎfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËfl ÔÂÂÍÓÒ‡
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ
“PICTURE TILT” ̇ ÒÚ. 23.
• èË ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË Ú‡ÍËı ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Í‡Í
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËÂ Ò ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ̇
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π‚ÓÁÌË͇ÂÚ Í‡ÚÍÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌ˚È
ÔÂÂ˚‚ ‚ ÔÂ‰‡˜Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. ùÚÓ
Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. ùÚÓÚ
ÔÂÂ˚‚ ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏ ‰Îfl ÒÚ‡·ËÎËÁ‡ˆËË
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
• èË ÂÁÍÓÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË ÚÂÏÔÂ‡ÚÛ˚
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÂÚ ËÁ‰‡‚‡Ú¸
ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË Ë
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË ÔË ˝ÚÓÏ
ÌÓχθÌ˚, ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ. ÖÒÎË
ÔË ‡·ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌËÂ
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ, ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ‰Û„ËÂ
Ô˘ËÌ˚ ˝ÚÓ„Ó fl‚ÎÂÌËfl – ̇ ‚ÒflÍËÈ
ÒÎÛ˜‡È ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÔÓÒËÚ¸ χÒÚÂ‡
ÔÓ‚ÂËÚ¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.
42
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
42
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
Технические данные
íÂ΂¢‡ÚÂθÌ˚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚:
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË:
ä‡Ì‡Î˚ Ë ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4,43 MHz
ä‡Ì‡Î ÌËÁÍÓÈ VHF (VL) = 46,25 - 168,25 Ɉ
ä‡Ì‡Î ‚˚ÒÓÍÓÈ VHF (VH) = 175,25 - 463,25 Ɉ
ä‡Ì‡Î UHF (U)
= 471,25 - 863,25 Ɉ
èËÌËχÂÚ Í‡·ÂθÌ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ‚ Ò‰ÌÂÏ ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌÂ
(X - Z + 2, S1 - S10), ÒÛÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌ (S11 - S20) Ë „ËÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌÂ
(S21 - S41).
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K)
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÏÛθÚËÔÎÂÍÒÌÓ„Ó
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡
üÁ˚ÍË ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡
èËÚ‡ÌËÂ
ÄÛ‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-1
FLOF (Fastext), WST (World Standard Text)
ëÏ. Ú‡·ÎËˆÛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” ̇ ÒÚ. 34.
èÂ. ÚÓÍ 110 - 240 Ç, 50/60 Ɉ
çÓÏË̇θ̇fl ‚˚ıӉ̇fl ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸: 20 ÇÚ + 20 ÇÚ
ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-2
ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3/COMPONENT ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 5
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰/ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È ‚ˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ (Y/C‚/CR) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.
• ç‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡˛ÚÒfl Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚ (Ò˄̇Î˚ 525P).
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-4
ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.
è‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT
ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3,
• ÇˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.
ÉÌÂÁ‰Ó „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ)
ÑÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌ˚ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ èÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl X 1 (RM-C214)
ŇڇÂÈÍË AA/R6 X 2
ÉÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË
HV-34LPZ: 12 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2.
HV-29LPZ: 10 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2.
èÓÚ·ÎflÂχfl ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸
HV-34LPZ: å‡ÍÒËχθ̇fl 255 ÇÚ, Ò‰Ìflfl 170 ÇÚ
HV-29LPZ: å‡ÍÒËχθ̇fl 254 ÇÚ, Ò‰Ìflfl 170 ÇÚ
ê‡ÁÏÂ ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡
HV-34LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 87ÒÏ ê‡ÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl 80 ÒÏ
(ÔÓ ‰Ë‡„Ó̇ÎË)
HV-29LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 73ÒÏ ê‡ÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl 68 ÒÏ
ɇ·‡ËÚ˚ (Ñ X Ç X ò)
HV-34LPZ: 898 ÏÏ X 728 ÏÏ X 579 ÏÏ
HV-29LPZ: 732 ÏÏ X 588 ÏÏ X 518 ÏÏ
ÇÂÒ
HV-34LPZ: 75 Í„
HV-29LPZ: 48 Í„
Конструкция и технические данные могут быть изменены без
уведомления.
àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl, ÔÓÎÛ˜‡ÂÏ˚ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ ÂÁÛθڇÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ZOOM
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, Á‡Ô¢‡ÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îfl ͇ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÍÓÏÏÂ˜ÂÒÍËı ËÎË
‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËÓÌÌ˚ı ˆÂÎÂÈ ‚ Ó·˘ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ÏÂÒÚ‡ı (͇ÙÂ, „ÓÒÚËÌˈ‡ı Ë Ú.Ô.) ·ÂÁ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl
Ô‰‚‡ËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó Òӄ·ÒËfl ÓÚ ‚·‰ÂθˆÂ‚ ‡‚ÚÓÒÍËı Ô‡‚ ̇ ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚È ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.
43
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
43
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
LCT1218-001A-H_R/22-44
44
Black
4/9/02, 7:09 PM
Download PDF

advertising